Leapfrog Geo User Manual

User Manual
for Leapfrog Geo version 2.1
Copyright 2014 ARANZ Geo Limited

All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, reproduction, or disclosure is prohibited.
Patents pending. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. While
every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this amanual, ARANZ Geo assumes no responsibility for
errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from use of the information contained
herein.
ARANZ Geo Limited documentation often refers to hardware or software products by their trade names. In most, if not
all, cases these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. The
trade names are used here for identification purposes only.
ARANZ Geo Limited
P O Box 3894
Christchurch 8140
New Zealand
Contents
Help for Leapfrog Geo 2.1
Getting Started with Leapfrog Geo
Leapfrog Geo Tutorials
Leapfrog Blog
Getting Started
Activating the Licence
Activating a Trial Licence
Activating a Dongle-Based Licence
Checking Out an OnDemand Licence
Activating Module Licences
Launching Leapfrog Geo
Upgrading Projects
Converting Leapfrog Hydro Projects
Managing Project Files
Saving Projects
Saving Zipped Copies
Saving a Backup Copy of a Project
Compacting Projects
Reporting a Problem
10
Running the Graphics Test
10
Troubleshooting Video Card Issues
11
Updating Your Video Card Driver
11
Checking Your 3D/OpenGL Settings
12
Getting Support
12
The Leapfrog Geo Main Window
15
Working with the Project Tree
17
Processing Tasks
20
Prioritising Tasks
20
Correcting Errors
21
Naming and Renaming Objects in the Project Tree
22
Commenting on Objects in the Project Tree
22
Viewing Object Properties
22
The Histogram Tab
23
The Statistics Tab
24
Sharing Objects
24
Finding Objects in the Project Tree
25
Deleting Objects
25
Interacting with the Scene
25
2014 ARANZ Geo Limited
ii | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
Locating an Object From the Scene
28
Clicking in the Scene
28
Clicking in the Scene List
29
Using the Moving Plane
30
Slicing Through the Data
31
Measuring in the Scene
33
Determining an Objects Size
33
Determining a Location
33
Using the Ruler to Measure Distances
35
Drawing in 3D
36
Drawing With the Curved Line Tool
37
Adjusting the Polyline
38
Adding Surface Tangents
39
Using the Surface Ribbon and Inside/Outside Labels
40
Flipping the Polyline
40
Drawing With the Straight Line Tool
40
Flipping the Line
42
Using the Surface and Normal Ribbons
42
Changing Preferences
43
Changing Display and Navigation Settings
43
Acceleration Mode
43
Font Size
43
Z-Axis Scale
43
Rotation Settings
44
Camera Settings
44
Changing Overlay Preferences
44
Screen Grid Settings
44
Axis Lines Settings
44
Other Settings
45
Changing the Colour Scheme
45
Changing Lighting Preferences
45
Changing Processing Preferences
45
Changing Help Preferences
46
Changing the 3D Acceleration Mode
46
Scaling the Z Axis
46
Visualising Data
49
Using the Shape List and Shape Properties Panel
50
Changing an Objects Display Colour
53
Changing a Colourmap
53
Editing a Continuous Colourmap
54
Creating a Discrete Colourmap
54
Contents | iii
Using a Colourmap to Display Dates

Importing and Exporting Colourmaps
56
56
Exporting a Colourmap
57
Importing a Colourmap
57
Displaying Drillholes
57
Displaying Drillholes as Lines or Cylinders
58
Hiding Lithologies
59
Displaying a Legend
60
Changing Colourmaps
60
Viewing Multiple Interval Tables
61
Selecting From Multiple Columns
61
Displaying Interval Data in the Scene
62
Displaying Points Data
63
Displaying Surfaces
65
Displaying Structural Data
66
Viewing Data with the Slicer in the Scene
67
Viewing GIS Data
67
Creating Custom Topography Views

Evaluating Objects
68
70
Defining Boundaries in a Leapfrog Geo Project
71
Setting a Clipping Boundary
71
Defining a Topography
73
Creating the Topography Using an Elevation Grid
74
Creating the Topography From a Surface, Points or GIS Vector Data
74
Setting a Fixed Elevation
74
Adding Height Data to the Topography
75
Changing Topography Settings
76
Changing the Size of the Topography
76
Changing the Resolution of the Topography
76
Applying a Trend to the Topography
77
Displaying Topography in the Scene Window
77
Projecting Collars Onto the Topography
78
Setting Object Extents
79
Importing and Working with Drillhole Data

Importing Drillhole Data
81
81
Expected Drillhole Data Format
84
The Collar Table
85
Interval Tables
85
The Screens Table
85
The Survey Table
86
Selecting the ODBC Data Source
86
iv | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
Connecting to an acQuire Database
86
Saving a Selection
87
Appending Drillholes
87
Importing Interval Tables
87
Importing Columns
88
Importing Screens
88
Importing Point Values Down Drillholes
88
Importing Downhole Structural Data
89
Using the Table Dialog
90
Drillhole Desurveying in Leapfrog Geo
90
Spherical Arc Approximation
91
Raw Tangent
91
Balanced Tangent
92
Changing Survey Table Options
92
Correcting Drillhole Data Errors
94
Exporting Drillhole Data Errors
94
Correcting Drillhole Data Errors in Leapfrog Geo
95
Checking for Missing Files
96
Ignoring Errors
96
Modifying Data
96
Fixing Collar Maxdepths
96
Replacing All
97
Replacing a Selection
98
Handling Special Values in Drillhole Data

Processing Drillhole Data
98
100
Compositing Category Data
101
Converting Ignored Segments
102
Filtering Interior and Exterior Short Segments
104
Compositing Numeric Data
105
Grouping Lithologies
107
Automatically Creating Lithology Groups
110
Splitting Lithologies
111
Selecting Intervals
114
Creating an Overlaid Lithology Column
117
Creating a New Category Column from Numeric Data
118
Back-flagging Drillhole Data
119
Viewing Correlation Statistics
119
Creating a New Merged Drillhole Data Table
119
Adding Core Photo Links
120
Setting Up the ALS Interface
121
Using the ALS Interface
123
Contents | v
Setting Up the Coreshed Interface
123
Using the Coreshed Interface
124
Deleting Drillhole Data
125
Reloading Drillhole Data
125
Exporting Drillhole Data
125
Exporting All Drillhole Data
126
Exporting a Single Drillhole Data Table
126
Importing and Working with Other Data Types
127
Importing and Working with GISData, Maps and Images
128
Importing Vector Data
128
Importing Maps and Images
129
Georeferencing in Leapfrog Geo
130
Manual Georeferencing
130
Automatic Georeferencing
134
Exporting a Georeferenced Image
134
Importing 2D Grids
135
Importing a MapInfo Batch File
136
Importing Data From an ESRIGeodatabase
137
Setting Elevation for a GISObject
137
Creating a New GIS Lines Object
138
Drawing a New GIS Lines Object

Exporting GIS Data
138
139
Importing and Working with Points Data
140
Importing Points Data
140
Appending Points Data
140
Extracting Points from Drillhole Data
140
Extracting Contact Points from Drillhole Data
141
Extracting Intrusion Values from Drillhole Data
142
Changing Intrusion Point Generation Parameters
143
Extracting Interval Midpoints from Drillhole Data
144
Importing Geophysical Data
145
Creating a Grid of Points
145
Exporting a Grid of Points
146
Evaluating Points Data
146
Exporting Points Data
147
Creating and Importing Structural Data
148
Creating a New Structural Data Table
148
Importing Structural Data
151
Editing Structural Data
153
Estimating Structural Data
153
Importing, Creating and Editing Meshes
154
vi | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
Importing a Mesh
154
Cleaning Up a Mesh
155
Importing an Elevation Grid
155
Creating Meshes
156
Creating a Mesh from the Moving Plane
157
Combining Meshes to Create a New Volume
158
Clipping a Volume
158
Clipping a Mesh
158
Extracting Mesh Parts from a Surface
159
Creating an Interpolated Mesh
159
Refining Interpolated Meshes
160
Creating and Editing a Triangulated Mesh
161
Creating and Editing an Offset Mesh
164
Draping an Image on a Mesh
165
Exporting a Mesh
165
Exporting a Single Mesh
166
Exporting Multiple Meshes from the Meshes Folder
166
Exporting Multiple Meshes from Models and Interpolants
167
Exporting an Elevation Grid
167
Exporting a Thickness Grid
168
Importing, Creating and Exporting Polylines
169
Importing Polylines
169
Building Query Filters
171
Leapfrog Geo Query Syntax
171
Building a Query
173
Advanced Query Building
173
Working with Surfaces in Leapfrog Geo
175
Surface Resolution in Leapfrog Geo
175
Adding Data to Surfaces
176
Adjusting Surfaces
177
Creating and Applying Structural Trends
179
Displaying a Structural Trend
181
Applying a Structural Trend
182
Editing a Surface with Polylines
183
Editing a Surface with Structural Data
185
Extending a Surface
185
Building and Refining Geological Models

Building a Geological Model
189
190
Selecting the Base Lithology
190
Setting the Surface Resolution
190
Setting the Model Extents
191
Contents | vii
Creating the Model
191
Viewing the Model in the Scene
192
Copying a Geological Model
192
Creating a Static Copy of a Geological Model
192
Exporting Geological Model Volumes and Surfaces
193
Refining a Geological Model
194
Base Lithology
194
Surface Generation
194
Volume Generation
194
Surface Resolution for a Geological Model
194
Editing the Lithologies
195
Modifying the Model Boundary
196
Creating a Lateral Extent from a Polyline
197
Creating a Lateral Extent from GISVector Data
198
Creating a Lateral Extent from Points
199
Creating a Lateral Extent from Structural Data
200
Creating a Lateral Extent from a Surface
201
Creating a Lateral Extent from a Distance to Points
201
Creating a Lateral Extent from a Distance Function
202
Refining Extents
202
Creating and Refining a Base
203
Creating a Faulted Model
205
Defining Contact Surfaces
208
Dividing the Geological Model Volume Using the Surface Chronology
209
Younging Direction
212
Depositional and Erosional Contact Surfaces
212
Intrusional Contact Surfaces
215
Vein Contact Surfaces
216
Creating Depositional and Erosional Contact Surfaces
218
New Deposit/Erosion From the Base Lithology
218
New Deposit/Erosion From Other Lithology Contacts
222
New Deposit/Erosion From Other Data
223
Creating Intrusional Contact Surfaces
224
Compositing Intrusions
226
Editing Intrusions
226
Displaying Intrusion Points
226
Creating Veins
227
Creating Veins From Lithology Contacts
229
Creating Veins From Other Data
229
Changing Vein Surfacing Options
230
Setting the Vein Thickness
230
viii | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
Controlling Vein Pinch Out
230
Adjusting the Vein Reference Surface
232
Adding Data to the Reference Surface
233
Using a Planar Reference Surface
233
Changing the Vein Boundary
234
Adding a Polyline to the Vein Boundary
235
Adjusting the Vein Boundary Plane
235
Editing Vein Segments
236
Changing the Orientation of Vein Segments

Creating a Vein System
236
236
Adding Veins to the Vein System
238
Setting Vein Interactions
238
Creating Stratigraphic Sequences
239
Editing Contact Surfaces
242
The Surfacing Tab
243
The Trend Tab
243
The Value Clipping Tab
244
The Interpolant Tab
245
Copying the Surface Chronology to an Empty Fault Block

Adding Contact Surfaces to the Surface Chronology
Refining Lithological Volumes
245
245
247
Editing the Sub-Model
249
Building Interpolants
251
Interpolant Functions
251
The Spheroidal Interpolant Function

SpheroidalInterpolant Parameters
252
253
Sill
253
Nugget
253
Nugget to Sill Ratio
254
Base Range
254
Alpha
256
Drift
257
Accuracy
259
The Linear Interpolant Function
259
Linear Interpolant Parameters
260
Sill and Base Range
261
Nugget
261
Drift
261
Accuracy
262
Creating a Numeric Interpolant
263
Selecting the Values Used
263
Contents | ix
Selecting the Numeric Values
263
Applying a Query Filter
264
Applying a Surface Filter
264
Setting the Interpolant Boundary
264
Setting Compositing Options
264
Setting General Interpolant Properties
264
The Numeric Interpolant in the Project Tree
264
Viewing Numeric Interpolant Statistics
266
Creating an Indicator Interpolant
266
267
267
Setting the Cut-off
267
267
267
268
268
268
The Indicator Interpolant in the Project Tree
268
Importing a Variogram Model
270
Refining an Interpolant
271
Adjusting the Values Used
271
Using Contour Lines to Adjust Values Used
271
Setting Compositing Parameters for an Interpolant
273
Adjusting the Interpolant Boundary
273
Using a Model Volume
275
Clipping and Transforming Values for a Numeric Interpolant
275
Setting the Cut-off for an Indicator Interpolant
276
Changing the Trend for an Interpolant
276
Using a Structural Trend
277
Adjusting Interpolation Parameters
279
Changing the Isosurface Parameters for a Numeric Interpolant
279
Changing Surfacing and Volume Options for an Indicator Interpolant
280
Creating and Editing a Distance Function
280
Setting the Boundary
281
Setting a Trend
281
Adding Buffers
282
The New Distance Function in the Project Tree
282
Copying an Interpolant
283
Creating a Static Copy of an Interpolant
283
Exporting Interpolant Volumes and Surfaces
283
Combining Models
285
x | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
Creating a Static Copy of a Combined Model
286
Exporting a Combined Model
287
Flow Modelling
289
Working with ModFlow Models
290
Creating a New ModFlow Model
290
Changing the Horizontal Grid Spacing
292
Setting the Vertical Grid Layering
293
Editing the ModFlow Model
295
Importing a ModFlow Model
297
Evaluating ModFlow Models
298
Assigning an Evaluation for Export
298
Using a Combined Evaluation
298
Setting Hydrological Properties for a ModFlow Model
300
Displaying ModFlow Models
301
Grid Display Options
302
Viewing Block Information
304
Importing and Displaying Head Values and MT3D Concentrations
304
Generating a Head Value Mesh
305
Exporting a ModFlow Model
305
Exporting a Grid as a ModFlow File
305
Exporting a Grid for Groundwater Vistas
305
Exporting a Grid as a Groundwater Vistas Update
306
Working with FEFLOW Models
307
Displaying FEFLOW Models
307
Displaying a 3D Model
309
310
311
Importing a FEFLOW Grid
312
Creating a 2D FEFLOW Model
312
Boundary Options
314
Element Size Settings
314
Adding Features to the Grid
315
316
Evaluating FEFLOW Models
318
319
319
Setting Material Types for a FEFLOW Model
320
Exporting a FEFLOW Model
321
Importing and Creating Block Models

Importing a Block Model
323
323
Importing an Isatis Block Model
323
Contents | xi
Importing a Block Model in CSV Format

Exporting a Block Model
323
325
Exporting a Block Model in a Supported Format
325
Exporting a Block Model as Points
326
Creating a Block Model
326
Sharing Geochemical Data with ioGAS
329
Sending Lithology Data to ioGAS
330
Opening the Data in ioGAS
330
Sending a New Data Column Back to Leapfrog Geo
330
Importing ioGAS Data as Points
331
Planning Drillholes
333
Adding Planned Drillholes
333
Drillhole Planning Options
335
Viewing Drilling Prognoses
336
Exporting Planned Drillholes
336
Importing Planned Drillholes
337
Displaying and Presenting Data
339
Creating and Working with Sections
340
Creating a Cross Section in the Scene
341
Creating a Cross Section from an Image
342
Creating a Fence Section
343
Creating a Serial Section
344
Setting the Base Section
344
Setting the Offset Sections
345
Creating the Serial Section
345
Displaying a Serial Section
346
Exporting a Serial Section
346
Creating Section Layouts
347
Creating a New Section Layout
349
Using the Section Layout Editor
350
Object Names and Colours
353
Styling Layout Objects
353
Setting Up the Page
356
Organising the Section
356
Adding and Styling Models
357
Adding and Styling Drillholes and Planned Drillholes
358
Adding and Styling Surfaces
361
Organising the Legend Group
362
Changing the Legend Group Layout
363
Styling Legend Swatches
363
Making Legends Visible and Invisible
364
xii | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
Adding and Organising Annotations
365
Title
365
Title Block
365
Scale Bar
365
Location
365
Text Boxes
366
Images
366
Exporting the Section Layout
366
Copying a Section Layout
367
Exporting a Cross Section
367
Rendering Images
368
Saving and Editing Scenes
369
Creating and Exporting a Movie
369
Exporting Scenes to Leapfrog Viewer
371
Creating Contour Lines from a Surface
372
Exporting GIS Contours
372
Help for Leapfrog Geo 2.1

Leapfrog Geo allows rapid construction of 3D conceptual models directly from scattered drillhole and GISdata
without the need for manual digitisation. Leapfrog Geo uses implicit modelling to generate geological models in
hours rather than days. Leapfrog Geo uses a rapid 3D interpolation technique, FastRBF, to construct 3D
boundary models from drillhole data.
Leapfrog Geo was designed especially for geologists. Its streamlined workflow is easy to learn and use, and
basic modelling techniques can be learned quickly.
To get the most out of the information in this manual, you should be familiar with Microsoft Windows XP,
Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating systems and with basic geological terminology.
Experience with geological modelling software is not necessary.
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
l
Menu options, dialog items and buttons are in bold normal text. For example, click on the Leapfrog Geo
menu and select Preferences.
Filenames and directory paths are in monospace text. For example, C:\Program
Files\Leapfrog.
Some Leapfrog Geo features are only available as part of specialist modules. See Activating Module
Licences for information on installing licences for these specialist modules.
Getting Started with Leapfrog Geo

To activate a trial or dongle licence or extend an OnDemand licence, see Activating the Licence.
When you first launch Leapfrog Geo, the Projects tab is displayed. See Launching Leapfrog Geo for
information on using the Projects tab and managing Leapfrog Geo project files.
The Leapfrog Geo Main Window shows how the different parts of a Leapfrog Geo project are displayed in the
main window and is a good starting point for getting familiar with the Leapfrog Geo user interface.
Leapfrog Geo Tutorials

Work through the Leapfrog Tutorials, which introduce basic concepts in Leapfrog Geo. The tutorials take two to
four hours to complete and will get you to the point where you can start processing your own data.
Leapfrog Blog
Visit the Leapfrog blog at blog.leapfrog3d.com for geological modelling techniques and tips.
Getting Started
This section describes:
l
Getting Support

To run Leapfrog Geo, you need a licence. There are two types:
l
Trial licence. See Activating a Trial Licence.
A dongle-based licence. See Activating a Dongle-Based Licence.
Activating a Trial Licence

When you start Leapfrog Geo without a dongle connected, a window will appear indicating that no dongle can
be found:
If you wish to get a trial licence, click the first button to request a licence via the Leapfrog Geo website.
If you already have a trial licence and wish to activate it, you will have received an email containing a code.
Click on the Enter activation code button and enter the code in the window that appears:
Once the activation code is entered, click Activate Licence. The licence will be validated over the internet.
You can copy the activation code from the email and paste it into the first Activation Code field.
4 | Leapfrog Geo User Manual
If your organisation uses an authenticating firewall, tick the box for Manual proxy configuration and enter the
details required.
If the code cannot be activated and you are sure you have entered the code correctly, contact Customer
Support as described in Getting Support.
Activating a Dongle-Based Licence

If you have a USB dongle and need to activate your licence, plug the dongle in to your computer and start
Leapfrog Geo. Leapfrog Geo will check the dongle and prompt you to start the activation process:
There are two types of dongle-based licence:

l
A standard licence. Once this has been activated, the licence details will be displayed.
An OnDemand licence. Once this has been activated, you will be prompted to check out a licence.
The activation process is the same for both types of licence.

Click Next. A window will appear giving you two options:
Select the first option to install the licence over the internet. If your organisation uses an authenticating firewall,
tick the box for Manual proxy configuration and enter the details required. Click Install Licence.
Select the second option to install the licence manually. You will be prompted for the file location. Navigate to
the folder that contains the file and select the file. Click Open, then Install Licence.
If the licence cannot be installed, contact Customer Support as described in Getting Support.
Checking Out an OnDemand Licence | 5
Once the licence has been activated:

l
Standard dongle-based licence. Licence details will be displayed. The Module Licences tab shows
whether you have licences for any specialist modules. See Activating Module Licences for more
information.
OnDemand licence. You will be prompted to check out a licence. See Checking Out an OnDemand
Licence for more information.
Checking Out an OnDemand Licence

If you have just activated your OnDemand licence, a message will appear prompting you to check out a
licence:
The bars show the maximum checkout period, with each mark on the bars representing one day. Click on the
bars to select days:
To install a module licence, click on the button for that licence and select the required number of days. Click
Get Licence to download and install the selected licences.
Once the licence has been updated, the status of your licence will be updated and you can check out additional
days:
Once Leapfrog Geo is running, you can check out additional time by selecting Extend Licence from the
Leapfrog Geo menu or clicking on the button at the bottom of the main window:
Activating Module Licences

Some Leapfrog Geo features are only available if you have a licence for a specialist module. Your module
licence may be activated as part of your Leapfrog Geo licence activation. If this is the case, once the licence
has been activated, the modules you are licensed for will be shown in the Module Licences tab:
If, however, your licence has already been activated and you wish to activate a module licence, select Install
Licence from the Leapfrog Geo menu.
If you have an OnDemand licence, see Checking Out an OnDemand Licence.
The process is similar to that described in Activating a Dongle-Based Licence. Select whether to install the
licence over the internet or from a file and then click Install Licence. Once the licence has been installed, the
modules that have been activated will be displayed in the Module Licences tab.
Launching Leapfrog Geo | 7

When you first run Leapfrog Geo, run the graphics test to test the capability of your computers video card.
See Running the Graphics Test.
When you launch Leapfrog Geo, the main window will appear with the Projects tab displayed:
Thumbnails for the most recent projects are displayed in the Recent projects list. Click on a thumbnail to open
a project.
You can also navigate directly to the required project file by clicking on Open Project File.
To start a new project, click New Project at the top of the Projects tab. The new project will be saved in the
Search folder.
Once a project file has been opened, Leapfrog Geo switches to displaying the Scene View tab.
The second set of thumbnails is for projects contained in the Search folder:
l
Click on the folder button ( ) to change the Search folder. The Search folder is useful if you have one
folder in which you keep most of your Leapfrog Geo projects.
Click on the Refresh button ( ) to update the list of projects in the Search folder.
See Managing Project Files for more information on Leapfrog Geo project files.
See The Leapfrog Geo Main Window for more information on how the different parts of a Leapfrog Geo project
are displayed in the main window.
Upgrading Projects
When you open a project that was last saved in an earlier version of Leapfrog Geo, you may be prompted to
upgrade the project. A list of affected objects will be displayed. For large projects with many objects that need
to be reprocessed, the upgrade process may take some time.
It is a good idea to back up the project before opening it. Tick the Back up the project before upgrading
button, then click Upgrade and Open. Navigate to the folder in which to save the backup and click Save.
For large projects with many objects, upgrading without backing up the project is not recommended.
Converting Leapfrog Hydro Projects

Leapfrog Hydro projects can be converted to Leapfrog Geo projects. However, the process is one-way, and
projects opened in Leapfrog Geo can no longer be opened in Leapfrog Hydro.
When you open a Leapfrog Hydro project, you will be prompted to save a backup before converting the project:
Once a Leapfrog Hydro has been converted to Leapfrog Geo, it can no longer be opened in Leapfrog Hydro.
It is strongly recommended that you back up the project before converting it.
In the Projects tab, the thumbnails for unconverted Leapfrog Hydro projects in the Search folder will be
marked as Leapfrog Hydro projects:
Managing Project Files | 9
Managing Project Files

Leapfrog Geo project files use the extension .aproj. A folder is also created that contains information used by
the project.
Do not change the name of this folder or alter its contents. Doing so could render your project file unusable.
A .lock file is created when a project is opened. The .lock file protects the project from being moved while the
project is open and from being opened by another instance of Leapfrog Geo, which can happen when projects
are saved on shared network drives.
Saving Projects
Leapfrog Geo automatically saves an open project each time a processing task has been completed or settings
have changed. Projects are also saved when they are closed so that scene settings can be restored when the
project is next opened.
Saving Zipped Copies

You can save a zipped copy of a project by selecting Save A Zipped Copy from the Leapfrog Geo menu.
You will be prompted to choose a name and location for the zipped project. Click Save to create the zip file.
Saving a Backup Copy of a Project

You can save a backup copy of a project by selecting Save A Copy from the Leapfrog Geo menu. You will be
prompted to choose a new name and location for the saved project. Click OK to create the new project file.
Leapfrog Geo will save a copy of the project in the location selected.
Once the backup copy is saved, you can open and use it from the Projects tab. Otherwise, you can keep
working in the original copy of the project.
Compacting Projects
When you delete objects from a project file, Leapfrog Geo retains those objects but notes that they are no
longer used. Over time, the project file will grow in size and data stored in the database may become
fragmented.
Compacting a project removes these unused objects and any unused space from the database. When you
compact a project, Leapfrog Geo will close the project and back it up before compacting it. Depending on the
size of the project, compacting it may take several minutes. Leapfrog Geo will then reopen the project.
To compact a project, select Compact This Project from the Leapfrog Geo menu. You will be asked to
confirm your choice.
Reporting a Problem
If Leapfrog Geo encounters an error, the Leapfrog Geo Problem window will be displayed. Enter as much
information as you can about the problem, then click Send.

Leapfrog Geo can run in one of three acceleration modes. These modes are selected by clicking on the button
at the bottom of the main window:
See Changing the 3D Acceleration Mode for more information on these settings.
When you first run Leapfrog Geo, run the graphics test to test the capability of your computers video card.
To start the test, open Leapfrog Geo and select Test Graphics from the Leapfrog Geo menu:
The graphics test displays a series of image pairs that test the capabilities of your video card for the currently
selected acceleration mode. For each pair, compare the images:
Troubleshooting Video Card Issues | 11
Even if the differences are slight, click the Images Differ button. If the images match, click the Images Match
button. The next test will be displayed.
At the conclusion of the test, the result is displayed. If one or more tests have failed, information about solving
problems will be displayed.
If you click on Save Report, you will be prompted to save the file on your computer.
If the test has failed, try switching to a different acceleration mode and running the test again. If possible, avoid
using Software Rendering as it can be very slow.
If you cannot resolve the problem following the steps described in Troubleshooting Video Card Issues, save a
copy of the graphics test report and contact technical support as described in Getting Support. Be sure to
include information about your system copied from the About > System Info tab.
Troubleshooting Video Card Issues

If the graphics test fails, there are two steps you can take to correct the problem:
l
Ensure your video driver is up-to-date. See Updating Your Video Card Driver.
Check your video cards 3D/OpenGL settings. See Checking Your 3D/OpenGL Settings.
Updating Your Video Card Driver

The best way to update your video driver is to do this using any tools that your computers manufacturer
provides. For example, some manufacturers allow you to update drivers using a tool installed in the Start
screen (Windows 8) or Start menu (Windows 7 and Windows XP). Look for items that carry the manufacturers
name. Another option is to right-click on the desktop to see if there is an update tool available. In the example
below, the manufacturer has included an option for updating video drivers called NVIDIAControl Panel:
If your computer appears to have no manufacturer-installed tools for updating drivers, you can go to the
manufacturers website and see if updates are available there. Look for parts of the website relating to support
and driver downloads or driver updates.
If your computers manufacturer does not provide information to help you update your video driver, you can run
the Hardware Update Wizard to see if a newer driver is available. To do this:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Open the System option.
3. Switch to the Hardware tab.
4. Click on the Device Manager option.
5. Click to open the Display adapters option.
6. Right-click on the display adapter and choose the Update Driver option:
Next, follow the steps to complete the wizard. If the wizard cannot update your software because your
computer already has the latest software, it may be that your video driver is already up-to-date and that the
reason the graphics test fails may lie in the cards 3D/OpenGL settings. See Checking Your 3D/OpenGL
Settings.
If your video cards driver has been updated, run the graphics test again to see if the computer passes the
tests. If the test still fails, contact technical support as described in Getting Support. Be sure to include
information about your system copied from the About > System Info tab.
Checking Your 3D/OpenGL Settings

The step or steps at which your computer fails the graphics test may indicate what 3D/OpenGL settings need
to be changed. Save the graphics test report, as described in Running the Graphics Test and contact technical
support as described in Getting Support.
Getting Support
Technical support is available by visiting http://www.leapfrog3d.com/contact/support.
When contacting technical support, please include your licence number and a full description of the problem or
query, including any information provided in system error messages.
Getting Support | 13
You can access your licence information by selecting About from the Leapfrog Geo menu:
You may also be asked to provide a copy of the log files. To find out where these are stored, select About from
the Leapfrog Geo menu, then click on the System Info. tab. Click on the link to open the folder that contains
the log files:
The Leapfrog Geo Main Window

The Leapfrog Geo main window is divided into three main parts:
The Project Tree contains all the data in the project and tools for working with that data. When you
want to change how this data is used in the project, work with the objects in the project tree.
The Scene View tab displays a 3D representation of selected objects from the project tree.
Changing how you view objects in the scene window does not change those objects in the project
tree.
Tools for changing the appearance of data in the scene window are available in the shape list and
the shape properties panel. Changing the appearance of these objects does not change those
objects in the project tree.
You can add objects to the scene window by dragging them from the project tree. You can temporarily hide
them in the scene or remove them altogether using the controls in the shape list.
When you open a Leapfrog Geo project, the project is displayed in the state it was in when it was closed.
You can split the Leapfrog Geo main window into separate parts to make better use of your screen space.
To detach a tab, click on it and drag it away from the main window. You can then move and resize the
detached tab.
You can also detach a tab by right-clicking on it and selecting Detach.

Detached tabs can be docked by dragging them onto the main window. When the tab becomes partially
transparent, release the mouse button; the tab will dock onto the main window.
To detach the project tree, right-click at the top of the project tree and select Detach:
To reattach the project tree, drag it to the main window as you would when reattaching a tab. You can also
reattach it by clicking the red X to close the project tree.
The Scene View tab is made up of the scene window, the shape list and the shape properties panel. The
shape list and shape properties panel can be displayed on the righthand side of the scene rather than below
the scene. To do this, right-click in the shape list and select Move List to Right:
Working with the Project Tree | 17
You can also detach the shape list and display it as a tab, which can then be detached from the main
window. To do this, right-click in the shape list and select Put List in Separate Tab:
You can then detach the tab from the main window:
To dock the shape list to the Scene View tab, right-click in the Shape List tab and choose where you wish
to dock the list:
The shape list and shape properties panel can also be minimised. Restore the shape list by clicking on the
button at the bottom of the Leapfrog Geo main window:
Working with the Project Tree

The series of folders in the project tree are used to organise objects such as maps, images and data sets into
categories. These folders also provide tools that let you import information into the project and generate
models. Right-click on each folder to view the actions you can perform using that folder.
You can also right-click on objects within the top-level folders to view more information on that object or carry
out actions specific to that object. For example, right-clicking on a table of imported drillhole data reveals a
menu showing possible actions:
When a bold option appears in the right-click menu, as Open does in the menu above, that option can also be
selected by double-clicking on the object.
You can select more than one object in the project tree by holding down the Shift key or the Ctrl key while
clicking. This is useful for viewing or deleting multiple objects at once.
Some actions are not available until data has been imported into the project.
Some objects may appear in the project tree as restricted:
Restricted objects were created using features only available in modules. You can display restricted
objects in the scene and change how they are displayed, but you cannot make changes to the objects
themselves. Contact Customer Support as described in Getting Support for more information about
licensing modules.
The key to working with the project tree is to realize that it is organized from the top down. In many software
packages (including Leapfrog Geo), the tree is organized to start from the data and work towards the outputs or
models created from the data. This works well in problems that support a defined step-by-step workflow where
it is not necessary to combine data from many sources. In complicated models, though:
l
Its easy to become lost in the amount of data in the project.
Its often hard to know where to start.
Its sometimes difficult to see how the model was created.
The way folders and objects are organised in the project tree lets you reveal or hide information about an object
to focus on objects you are currently working with. This is also useful when you are exploring a project and
want to determine how something was put together. Leapfrog Geo projects can be complex and the number of
objects in the project tree can seem overwhelming. The arrows next to objects in the project tree let you reveal
Working with the Project Tree | 19
or hide an objects details to focus on objects you are currently working with. Here, the Topographies folder is
expanded to show a Topography object that is made up of a mesh:
The mesh itself is stored in the Meshes folder, but is hyperlinked to from wherever it is used in the project.
The Drillhole Data folder and the Drillholes object have been expanded to show the drillhole data tables.
Tables shown in bold are those displayed in the scene.
Folders that have no arrow have no detail stored.
Expanding a geological model reveals information about how it was built. Here, a geological model has been
expanded to show the basic objects that make up a model:
The five objects underneath the geological model GM represent the five basic parts of a geological model:
l
The Boundary object defines the outer limits of the geological model.
The Fault System object defines faults and their interactions in the geological model.
The Lithologies object defines the lithologies in the model.
The Surface Chronology object defines the structure of the models contact surfaces.
The Output Volumes folder contains the generated units (outputs) that make up the geological model.
Here, boundary objects for a geological model have been expanded to show how they were created:
The Topography object is included as the models upper boundary. The East boundary object was created
using a polyline from the Polylines folder and the West boundary object was created using a GIS data object
in the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder. Clicking on the hyperlinks will locate the object from which the
extent was created.
Processing Tasks
The processing queue button shows how many tasks are currently being processed:
Objects will be added to the processing queue when you make changes to them via the project tree.
l
To view the queue and progress on processing, click the queue button or press Alt + P.
To pause processing, press Ctrl + P. To resume processing, press Ctrl + P again.
The button will turn grey when all processing is complete.

You can close a project while is still running tasks. When you next open the project, the remainder of the tasks
in the processing queue will be processed.
Prioritising Tasks
Tasks can be prioritised and their inputs processed before other objects. To prioritise a task, right-click on an
object in the project tree and select Prioritise. Prioritised tasks are marked in the project tree with an arrow:
Correcting Errors | 21
Prioritising an object is useful when you are editing it and wish to view the effect of changes without
reprocessing all objects in the project. For example, you may be modifying a boundary or contact surface
for a geological model. You can prioritise the surface, then run it each time you make changes.
To run only prioritised tasks, click the processing queue button, then click Priority Only:
The processing queue button will change to show that only priority tasks will be run:
The number of objects that have been prioritised is indicated by the button at the top of the project tree (
).
To view prioritised tasks, click the button. All prioritised objects will be selected and displayed in the project
tree.
To reset a priority object, right-click on it and select Clear Priority.
Click the processing queue button, then click Run All to resume normal processing.
Correcting Errors
If processing of an object fails, all other objects dependent on that object will also fail. Click the processing
queue button to view the errors. To inspect the source of error, right-click on the object in the task queue and
select Go toProject Tree:
Right-click on the object in the project tree, then select Properties. The Errors tab shows information on any
processing errors for the object and may be helpful in fixing the error.
Naming and Renaming Objects in the Project Tree

When an object is created in Leapfrog Geo, it is given a default name. It is a good idea to give objects in
Leapfrog Geo names that will help you distinguish them from other objects, as large projects with complicated
models will contain many objects.
To rename an object in the project tree right-click on the object and select Rename. The Rename Object
window will be displayed:
Enter a new name for the object. Click Rename to change the objects name.
Another aid to documenting work in a project is comments. See Commenting on Objects in the Project Tree.
Commenting on Objects in the Project Tree

You can record comments on any object in the project tree, which can be helpful when the project contains
many objects and when several different people are working on a model. Objects that have comments are
indicated in the project tree by a comment balloon ( ). The comment will be displayed when you right-click on
the object:
Tab or click to add a new comment or edit an existing one. You can also add standard information to a
comment, such as date and time.
You can add information about the project as a whole using the Notes object ( ), which is the last object in the
project tree. Double-click on the Notes object to open it and add information.
Viewing Object Properties

You can view the properties of most objects imported into or created in Leapfrog Geo. To do this, right-click on
the object in the project tree and select Properties.
The information available in the Properties window depends on the type of object. There are three tabs that
appear for each type of object:
l
The Processing tab shows the current status of the processing (queued to process, processing,
finished).
The Histogram Tab | 23
The Errors tab shows errors that have occurred while processing the object. See Processing Tasks.
Many objects also have a General tab that summarises information about the object. The amount of
information in the General tab will vary according to the type of object. For example, for table objects, the
General tab shows the tables data structure.
Other tabs included in the Properties window for some objects are:
l
The Histogram Tab
The Statistics Tab
The Histogram Tab

When you view properties for interval tables and numeric data tables, the Histogram tab shows the distribution
of the data in a particular column:
If the table contains several columns, you can display histograms for each column. If so, you will be able to
choose the other columns from the dropdown box. You can also:
l
Adjust the number of intervals in the histogram by changing the Bin count.
Remove values less than zero by ticking the Semilog X box.
Changes made to the way the histogram is displayed are not saved when the Properties window is closed.
The Statistics Tab

When you view properties for some objects, a Statistics tab is available. For example, the Statistics tab for an
interpolant shows the distribution statistics for each output volume:
You can copy the information displayed in the Statistics tab to the clipboard for use in other applications.
When a grid of points has been evaluated against interpolants and geological models, the Statistics tab for the
grid will display statistics for the interpolant evaluations against geological model categories:
If multiple geological models and interpolants have been evaluated, you can select the evaluated models and
interpolants from the dropdown lists. Copying the data only copies the data currently displayed for the selected
model and interpolant.
Sharing Objects
Some objects are created as part of working with other objects and are not available elsewhere in the project.
An example of this is a polyline drawn as part of creating a geological model boundary. To share such objects
Finding Objects in the Project Tree | 25
within the project, right-click on the object in the project tree and click Share. The shared object will be copied
to the relevant location in the project tree and a hyperlink added to the object it was shared from.
For example, here a polyline created as a lateral extent is shared:
The polyline is saved to the Polylines folder and a hyperlink to it appears as part of the geological models
boundary.
Finding Objects in the Project Tree

To find objects in the project tree, click anywhere in the project tree and type Ctrl-F. The Find window will be
displayed:
Enter the information you are searching for, then click Backwards or Forwards to locate the object in the
project tree.
Deleting Objects
When you delete an object from the project tree, a window will be displayed listing all other objects in the
project that will also be deleted and those that will be reprocessed. Consider carefully the effects on other
objects in the project, as once an object is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
Deleting data from the project may cause other objects to be reprocessed, which can take some time.
To delete more than one object from the tree, hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl key while selecting objects.
Interacting with the Scene

For information on how to display objects in the scene, see Visualising Data.
The best way to navigate the 3D scene in Leapfrog Geo is using the mouse. If you are running Leapfrog Geo on
a laptop, it is recommended that you plug in a mouse rather than using the laptops touchpad for navigation.
However, you can also navigate in the scene using the keyboard.
Action
Mouse
Keyboard
Changing the
viewing angle
Click and drag to rotate the

scene
Press the arrow keys to rotate the scene
Zooming in and
out of the scene
Use the scroll wheel
Press the Page Up or Page Down keys
Hold the right mouse button

while moving the mouse
For smaller steps, hold down the Shift key while

pressing the Page Up or Page Down keys
Panning the
scene
Click and hold both mouse

buttons, then drag
Hold down the Alt key while pressing the arrow keys
For smaller steps, hold down the Shift key while

pressing the arrow keys
Hold the scroll wheel and drag
Centre an object
in the scene
Click the scroll wheel

Click both mouse buttons
together
Use the Look menu above the scene window to switch to different viewing angles:
If you prefer to navigate using the keyboard, use the keyboard shortcuts shown in the Look menu.
The current viewing angle and scale are displayed in the lower righthand corner of the scene window:
Interacting with the Scene | 27
You can change how the viewing angle and scale are displayed in the Overlays tab of Preferences window.
You can save the current viewing angle as a bookmark by selecting Bookmark Viewing Angle from the Look
menu or by pressing Ctrl+B. Restore the bookmark by selecting Look > Restore Bookmark or by pressing B.
Only one viewing angle bookmark can be saved. The bookmark is not saved when Leapfrog Geo is shut
down.
The scene window displays a 3D representation of selected data from the project tree. You can add objects
from the project tree to the scene in two ways:
l
Click on the object and drag it into the scene. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl key while clicking to
select multiple items, then add them to the scene.
Right-click on the object and tick the View Object box.
Dragging objects into the scene window may be blocked by other applications on your computer. For
example, if you are sharing a screen using Skype, you will not be able to drag objects into the scene.
Once you have added objects to the scene window, you can change the appearance of those objects using the
controls in the shape list and the shape properties panel.
Changing how you view objects in the scene window does not change those objects in the project tree.
Visualising Data describes in detail how to change the visualisation of data in the scene, which is an important
part of interpreting data in the project and making modelling decisions.
Locating an Object From the Scene

When you have a number of objects displayed in the scene, it may not be readily apparent where you can find
more information about those objects. Leapfrog Geo helps you find the object in the project tree and the shape
list in two ways.
Clicking in the Scene

Clicking on an object in the scene displays a window that contains a summary of the data and, for many
objects, a link to the corresponding data in the project tree. For example, here drillhole data is displayed in the
scene and clicking on a segment displays the corresponding data:
Note that clicking on an object in the scene also selects it in the shape list.
Clicking in the Scene List | 29
Clicking in the Scene List

When you have objects displayed in the shape list and want to locate them in the project tree, simply right-click
on the object in the shape list and select Go to Project Tree:
The objects location in the project tree will be expanded and the object will be selected.
Using the Moving Plane

In Leapfrog Geo, the moving plane is used for measuring planar structures and defining coordinate system
orientations. There are two tools in the toolbar that relate to the moving plane:
To use the moving plane, click the Show plane button ( ) and position the plane in the scene. The main axis
of the moving plane is defined by the green line. The second axis is defined to be in the plane at right angles
(orthogonal) to the main axis. Third axis is perpendicular to the plane.
There are three ways to position the plane. You can:
l
Use the handles in the scene window to move the plane. If you cannot see the handles, click on the
moving plane.
Use the Plane controls in the shape properties panel to change the Dip, Dip Azimuth, Pitch and Centre
Point.
Orient the scene to look parallel to the required plane position, then click on the Draw plane line button (
). Draw the required line in the scene.
Drawing the plane line is usually the most convenient method of defining a planar structure.
There are three ways to remove the moving plane from the scene:
l
Click the Show plane button ( ).
Click another button to select a different tool.
In the shape list, click the delete button ( ) for the moving plane.
Slicing Through the Data | 31
Slicing Through the Data

The slicer is a powerful tool for revealing data that is concealed behind other objects and for emphasising data.
Slicing can be considered a form of dynamic sectioning. Two buttons in the toolbar can be used to add the
slicer to the scene:
You can add the slicer to the scene by clicking the Show slicer button ( ). The slicer will appear in the scene
and you can adjust its position using the controls in the shape list:
You can also click the Draw slicer line button ( ), then click and drag in the scene to cut a slice through the
scene.
The scene may appear empty because the slicer has removed all visible data. Reposition the slicer or turn it
off.
You can change the way the slice appears in the scene using the controls in the shape list, and finer controls
are available in the shape properties panel:
Right-click on the slicer in the shape list to view more information about each option:
The Lock to Camera ( ) option locks the slice to the current view, so that moving the scene changes the
direction of the slice.
These options can also be controlled from the Look menu:
The Set to list in the shape properties panel contains standard views, together with any sections displayed in
the scene:
To move the slicing plane in a direction orthogonal to the slicing plane, hold down the Ctrl key and the right
mouse button while dragging the mouse.
To change the thickness of a thick slice, hold down the Ctrl key and the middle mouse button while dragging
the mouse. If you have a two-button mouse, hold both buttons.
Measuring in the Scene | 33
Measuring in the Scene

Leapfrog Geo has a number of tools for making quantitative measurements in the scene. These include:
l
Using the moving plane to measure trends. See Using the Moving Plane.
Using the ruler to measure in the scene. See Using the Ruler to Measure Distances.
Determining an Objects Size

The easiest way to find information on the size of an object is to right-click on it in the project tree and select
Properties. Information on the size of the object will be displayed in the General tab.
You can also click on any object in the scene to view more information about it. This will open a window
containing more information about the object.
Determining a Location
The simplest way of measuring an approximate location in the scene is to first display an object in the scene
window, then position the cursor over the location. The position of the cursor is displayed at the bottom of the
Leapfrog Geo window:
The position of the cursor in the scene is calculated using the depth buffer on the graphics card and so is not an
exact method of measuring in the scene.
If you require an exact position, click on the object. Leapfrog Geo will compute the exact position and display it
in a pop-up window:
The point selected is highlighted in the scene.
Using the Ruler to Measure Distances | 35
Using the Ruler to Measure Distances

You can use the ruler to measure distances in three dimensional space and between drillholes and planned
drillholes.
The easiest way to use the ruler is to click on the Ruler button ( ) and click and drag between points in the
scene to start making measurements. A ruler line will appear in the scene to indicate the measurement.
Information about the distance measured will appear in the scene and in the shape properties panel:
The ruler tool stays active in the scene so you can make as many measurements as required.
You can also measure the distance between drillholes or between drillholes and a point. To do this, click on the
Calculate Distance button in the shape properties panel. The Distance Calculator window will appear:
You can select both drillholes and planned drillholes. Click Calculate to calculate the distance and update the
ruler in the scene. The distance value will appear in the Distance Calculator window.
You can also select a point in the scene by clicking the Select button ( ) in the Distance Calculator window,
then clicking in the scene. The location of the point in the scene will appear in the Distance Calculator
window.
After measuring a distance, it is a good idea to change the viewing angle to confirm that the measurement
has been made between the correct points in three dimensions.
There are two ways to remove the ruler from the scene:
l
Click the Select button ( ).
Click the delete button ( ) for the ruler object in the shape list.
Drawing in 3D
In Leapfrog Geo, you can draw polylines to define many surfaces, including lateral extents and contact
surfaces. You can also use polylines to make adjustments to surfaces and create new GISlines.
Leapfrog Geo has two line drawing tools: a straight line tool and a curved line tool.
l
With the curved line tool, click to add straight segments and click and drag to add curved segments.
When generating surfaces from curved polylines, the surface tangents are created from structural disks.
The curved line tool can be used for drawing polylines.
With the straight line tool, add a series of nodes to define the line. When generating surfaces from this
type of polyline, the lines are sampled into points and the surface tangent is implied from the plane in
which it is drawn. You can use the surface and normal ribbon tools to determine the orientation of the
polyline. The straight line tool can be used for drawing polylines and GIS lines.
Drawing With the Curved Line Tool | 37
Attempting to draw in 3D can lead to unpredictable results and so it is always best to draw in two dimensions
and add depth by some other means. In Leapfrog Geo, the best way to add depth when drawing is to use the
slicer, but when you draw using the straight line tool, you can also draw on other objects in the scene. Before
starting to draw, it is a good idea to orient the scene and add objects to it that will aid in drawing. Do not move
the scene while drawing.
See:
l

The curved line drawing tool is used to create curved or straight lines. The curved line tool provides greater
control over the shape of a polyline than the straight line tool (see Drawing With the Straight Line Tool). When
generating surfaces from curved polylines, the surface tangents are created from structural disks.
Polylines drawn using the curved line tool can be exported in Drawing Interchange Polylines (*.dxf) and
CSV Text (*.csv) formats. Polylines drawn using the straight line tool can only be exported in Drawing
Interchange Polylines (*.dxf) format.
When you first start to draw a polyline with the curved line tool, the drawing toolbar and the slicer will appear in
the scene.
Orient the slicer before starting to draw, and do not move it while drawing.
A polyline is made up of nodes ( ), which are the points drawn, and control points ( ), which adjust the curve
of the line. Straight segments have no control points. To start drawing, click on the Draw polyline button ( ).
Click in the scene to add nodes to form straight segments or click and drag to add curved segments.
While drawing, the cursor indicates what actions are possible:
Drawing. Clicking adds nodes to the polyline. Clicking and dragging adds a curved segment.
Closing the polyline. This cursor appears over the end node of the polyline. If you click, the polyline will
close.
Joining polyline segments. This cursor appears when you are drawing a different segment and move
the cursor over one of the ends of another segment. Click to join the two segments together.
Continuing the polyline. This cursor appears when you have terminated a segment and wish to start
redrawing. Move the cursor over an end node, then click to start drawing again.
A node cannot be placed at the current position. This often occurs when there are no objects in the
scene that can be drawn on. Try zooming in and out of the scene or, if necessary, changing the
viewing angle.
Here, the topography has been hidden and the scene rotated so that the different parts of the polyline can be
clearly seen. Switch to the Select tool ( ) to select and move nodes and segments. Here, one of the control
points is being selected:
Delete nodes or segments by clicking on them, then clicking on the Delete button ( ) or pressing the Delete
key. You can select the entire length of a polyline by double-clicking on one of the segments.
When you have finished drawing, right-click in the scene to end the polyline. You can then start drawing
another segment, if required.
When you right-click to finish a polyline, the right-click does not add a new node to the polyline.
Click the Save button ( ) to save the polyline. You can edit the polyline later by right-clicking on it in the
project tree and selecting Edit. If the polyline is in the shape list, click on the Edit button ( ).
Adjusting the Polyline

The polyline is made up of nodes ( ), which are the points drawn, and control points ( ), which adjust the
curve of the line. Straight segments have no control points.
You can:
l
Move a node. Click on the Select button ( ), then click on a node and drag it into position.
Adjust a curved segment. Click on the Select button ( ), then click on and drag one of the segments
control points.
Convert a straight segment to a curved segment.Click on the Select button ( ), then click on a
segment. Next, click the Curved segment button ( ). Control points will be added to the segment and
you can use them to adjust the curve.
Adding Surface Tangents | 39
Convert a curved segment to a straight segment. Click on the Select button ( ), then click on a
segment. Next, click the Straight segment button ( ). The control points will be deleted for the selected
segment.
Adding Surface Tangents

When you first draw a polyline, it has no tangents. Tangents are added to the polyline by adding structural
disks. To add a surface tangent:
1. Click on the Select button ( ).
2. Rotate the scene so that you are looking in the direction of the dip for the tangent you want to set.
3. Click at the point along the segment where you want to set the tangent:
4. Click the Tangent button ( ).

A disk will appear on the polyline:
The polyline will be updated to show the effect of the new tangent.
Clicking to select a node then clicking the Tangent button ( ) adds a disk at the node. To add tangents at all
nodes, double-click on a segment to select the whole line, then click the Tangent button ( ).
To change the dip of the tangent, change the viewing angle, then click the Tangent button ( ) once again. The
disk and polyline will be updated.
To change the dip of all tangents, double-click on a segment to select the whole line, then click the Tangent
button ( ). All disks will be updated.
To select multiple tangents, hold the Ctrl key while clicking on the disks.
You can add as many tangents as required, although it is best to keep them to a minimum.
Using the Surface Ribbon and Inside/Outside Labels

Once a tangent has been added to the polyline, new controls are available in the shape list and shape
properties panel:
The Surface ribbon (

polyline in the scene:
) and inside/outside labels ( ) tools help you to determine the orientation of the
If you are having trouble seeing the surface ribbon, you can change its size using the Ribbon width control in
the shape properties panel.
Flipping the Polyline

If the polyline is oriented incorrectly, click on the Select button ( ), then click the polyline to select it. Click on
the Flip polyline button ( ). The inside and outside of the polyline will be swapped and the polyline will be
updated in the scene.

The straight line tool is used to create straight polylines and GIS lines. To draw using this tool, you add a series
of nodes that define a line. When generating surfaces from this type of polyline, the lines are sampled into
points and the surface tangent is implied from the plane in which it is drawn. You can use the surface and
normal ribbon tools to determine the orientation of the polyline.
Polylines drawn using the curved line tool can be exported in Drawing Interchange Polylines (*.dxf) and
CSV Text (*.csv) formats. Polylines drawn using the straight line tool can only be exported in Drawing
Interchange Polylines (*.dxf) format.
Drawing With the Straight Line Tool | 41
When you first start to draw a polyline or GIS line with the straight line tool, the drawing toolbar and the slicer
will appear in the scene. There are two drawing options:
l
Draw on the slicer. Click on the Draw on slicer button (
) and orient the slicer before you start to draw.
Do not move the slicer while drawing.

l
Draw on other objects. Click on the Draw on objects button ( ) and add the object to the scene you
wish to draw on. When drawing on objects, you need to be careful to not draw on the wrong object. It is,
therefore, best to include in the scene only the minimum number of objects needed to draw effectively.
To start drawing, click on the Draw lines button ( ). Click in the scene to add points to form the line:
In the shape list, you can control the colour of the positive (red) and negative (blue) surfaces of the line and of
the line itself (green):
The Surface ribbon ( ) and Normal ribbon ( ) controls help you to determine the orientation of the polyline
in the scene. These controls are described below.
While drawing, the cursor indicates what actions are possible:
Drawing. Clicking adds points to the line.
Closing the line. This cursor appears over the end point of the line. If you click, a new point will be
added and the line will close.
Joining line segments. This cursor appears when you are drawing a different segment and move the
cursor over one of the ends of another segment. Click to join the two segments together.
Continuing the line. This cursor appears when you have terminated a segment and wish to start
redrawing. Move the cursor over an end node, then click to start drawing again.
A point cannot be placed at the current position. This often occurs when there are no objects in the
scene that can be drawn on. Try zooming in and out of the scene or, if necessary, changing the
viewing angle.
You can also:
l
Move points. Click on the Select button ( ). Hold down the Ctrl key and click on the point. You can then
drag it to a new position.
Add a point to a segment. Click on the Select button ( ), then click a segment to select it. Hold down the
Ctrl key and click and drag to add the new point.
Delete a segment. Click on the Select button ( ). Click on the segment to select it, then on the Delete
button ( ).
When you have finished drawing, right-click in the scene to end the line. You can then start drawing another
segment, if required.
When you right-click to finish a line, the right-click does not add a new node to the line.
Click the Save button ( ) to save the line. You can edit the line later by right-clicking on it in the project tree
and selecting Edit. If the line is in the shape list, click on the Edit button ( ).
Flipping the Line

If you have drawn a line but have not obtained the results you expected, it may be that the line is not oriented
correctly. You can flip the line so that the positive and negative sides are swapped. To do this, click on the
Select button ( ), then double-click the line to select it. Click on the Flip polyline button ( ).
Using the Surface and Normal Ribbons

The Surface ribbon and Normal ribbon are tools that help you to determine the orientation of the polyline in
the scene. For example, click on the Surface ribbon button ( ) to determine which side of the polyline is
positive (red) and which side is negative (blue):
Changing Preferences | 43
If you are having trouble seeing the surface ribbon, you can change its size using the Ribbon width control in
the shape properties panel:
Clicking the Normal ribbon button ( ) displays a ribbon perpendicular to the surface ribbon. The properties of
the normal ribbon can also be adjusted in the shape properties panel.
Changing Preferences
In the Preferences window, you can change scene navigation, display and processing options. Open the
Preferences window by clicking on the Leapfrog Geo menu and selecting Preferences:
Changing Display and Navigation Settings

In the Preferences window, click on Scene to change scene display and navigation settings. Select Revert
to return to the settings in place when the Preferences window was first opened.
Acceleration Mode
See Changing the 3D Acceleration Mode for more information.
Font Size
This setting is the size of text used to display information on the grid and axes.
Z-Axis Scale
This setting determines the scale of the Z axis relative to the X and Y axes. See Scaling the Z Axis for more
information.
Rotation Settings
The Geographic rotation and Free rotation settings determine whether or not the model displayed in the
scene window can be rolled. With the Geographic rotation option, the azimuth and elevation can be varied,
but the Z axis is constrained to be vertical. With the Free rotation option, however, the rotation of the model is
not fixed to any axis and the model can be freely rolled around any axis. Select the option you prefer. When
Leapfrog Geo is installed, Geographic rotation is set as the default option as it is the most commonly used.
The Rotate with left button and Rotate with right button settings determine how the mouse is used to rotate
the scene:
l
When Rotate with left button is selected, you can rotate the scene by holding down the left mouse
button and dragging in the scene. Clicking and holding the right mouse button zooms in and out of the
scene.
When Rotate with right button is selected, holding down the right mouse button and dragging rotates the
scene. However, zooming and rotating functions are not swapped. Instead, the left mouse button can
only be used for clicking on different objects in the scene. Select this option if you tend to accidentally
move the scene when you intend to click.
Camera Settings
The Orthographic projection and Perspective projection settings determine the view of the model in the
scene window.
If Perspective projection is selected, you can change the Perspective angle using the slider. This is similar
to adjusting the zoom setting on a camera. Higher angles make nearby objects larger and more distant objects
smaller. Lower angles will compress the scene. Experiment with the settings to see the effect on objects in the
scene.
Select the option you prefer.
Changing Overlay Preferences

In the Preferences window, click on Scene > Overlays to change what objects are included in the scene.
Changes you make to these settings are automatically updated in the scene. Experiment to see what overlays
you prefer. Select Revert to return to the settings in place when the Preferences window was first opened.
Screen Grid Settings

The Show screen grid setting determines whether or not the screen grid is displayed. Select the option you
prefer. The Loose Spacing, Normal Spacing and Fine Spacing options determine the spacing of the grid.
Axis Lines Settings

The Axis Lines settings determine how X-Y-Z coordinates are displayed in the scene. When axis lines are
enabled, the axes indicate the extent of data currently displayed in the scene.
Enable Show axis lines to display the east (red), north (green) and elevation (blue) axis lines.
Enable Put numbers on axes to display scale ticks along the grid. These are automatically adjusted to fit the
extent of the data and the current zoom setting.
Enable Show whole box to display the axis lines as a box that encloses the current data set.
Other Settings | 45
Other Settings
The scale bar, compass ball and viewing angle text are the navigation aids in the lower righthand corner of the
scene window.
When the slicer is in the scene, text describing its position will be displayed in the lower lefthand corner if the
Slicer position text option is enabled.
Changing the Colour Scheme

In the Preferences window, click on Scene > Colour Scheme to change the colour scheme used in the
scene.
Leapfrog Geo is installed with three colours schemes: Default, Black Background and White Background.
The scheme selected in the Schemes list will be used for all new Leapfrog Geo projects and for existing
projects when they are next opened.
Experiment with the settings to see how they affect the scene window. Select Revert to return to the settings
in place when the Preferences window was first opened.
To create a new scheme, click on an existing scheme. This is the scheme that will be used as a basis for
defining the new scheme. Next, click the New Scheme button and change its settings.
You can revert to the colour schemes defined when Leapfrog Geo was first installed by clicking on Factory
Reset.
Clicking on Factory Reset to revert to the original colour schemes deletes any custom colour schemes.
Changing Lighting Preferences

In the Preferences window, click on Scene > Lighting to change how visual effects are displayed in the
scene window. You may be able to use these settings to emphasise significance in the data displayed in the
scene.
The Ambient level setting determines the overall brightness of the scene.
The Specular brightness and Specular shininess settings determine how light appears to fall on the
surfaces in the scene. The Specular brightness setting has a stronger effect when Specular shininess is
soft.
You can have up to four light sources defined for a project. By default, two light sources are defined.
Changes made to these settings are automatically applied to the scene. Select Revert to return to the settings
in place when the Preferences window was first opened. You can revert to the lighting sources and settings
defined when Leapfrog Geo was first installed by clicking on Factory Reset.
Changing Processing Preferences

In the Preferences window, click on Scene > Processing to change how background processing is used to
run changes to data and models.
l
For the Automatic option, the number of background processes will be set based on your computers
CPU and RAM.
For the Disabled option, tasks will be run in the main process and no background processes will be used.
Select Revert to return to the settings in place when the Preferences window was first opened.
Changing Help Preferences

Changing the 3D Acceleration Mode
Leapfrog Geo can run in one of three acceleration modes. Select a different acceleration mode by clicking the
button at the bottom of the Leapfrog Geo main window:
In the 3D Acceleration window, select one of the acceleration modes:

l
Software Rendering uses software only, for maximum compatibility with any hardware. This option can
be very slow displaying all but the simplest scenes, and is provided as a fall-back if display issues cannot
be resolved with either of the other two options.
Partial Acceleration uses hardware acceleration that has been provided on graphics cards for many
generations of graphics cards. In this mode, Leapfrog Geo renders scenes using fixed function pipeline
hardware acceleration features that have been superceded in modern graphics cards by programmable
shaders, but this legacy capability is widely supported and offers performance advantages over software
rendering. Using Partial Acceleration can sometimes fix anomalies or problems encountered in Full
Acceleration mode that may be due to bugs in old drivers, and it should work with even old or lowerfeatured hardware.
Full Acceleration is the best option, assuming you have good hardware and up-to-date drivers. Because
it makes use of programmable shaders provided by modern graphics cards, it is the fastest of the three
modes and uses your available graphics memory more efficiently. It is the mode you should use, if your
system supports it.
First, try using Full Acceleration and see how it renders scenes. If you seem to be having issues with how
data is displayed in the scene, see Running the Graphics Test for information on testing your computers
graphics capabilities. Note that especially when graphics cards are new on the market, there may be a number
of driver versions released to address anomalies, so the use of a recent driver version is important. If using a
laptop with dual graphics cards, use it with the power supply connected, and select the Performance
Graphics option over the Power Saving option.
If that doesnt resolve the graphics problems, then try Partial Acceleration mode. If possible, avoid using
Software Rendering as it can be very slow.
If your current hardware is unable to support Full Acceleration mode, it may be worth considering upgrading
your graphics card. Medium- to high-end home PC and gaming graphics cards are sufficient. High-end
workstation grade cards also work very well, but you will also be paying for further capabilities that are not
utilised by Leapfrog Geo.
Scaling the Z Axis

Scaling the z-axis lets you set a value greater than 1.0 for the z-axis relative to the x- and y-axes. This is useful
when the area under study is very planar and extends over a wide area. In such cases, scaling the z-axis can
accentuate the distribution of data along the z-axis.
To scale the z-axis, click the button at the bottom of the Leapfrog Geo main window:
Scaling the Z Axis | 47
The Scale Z Axis window will appear:
Enter a value equal to or greater than 1. The contents of the scene will be automatically scaled, so you can
experiment with different values before choosing one that best accentuates the distribution of data. Click the
Close button to dismiss the window.
You can also change this setting by clicking on the Leapfrog Geo menu and selecting Preferences. The zaxis can be changed in the General tab.
Visualising Data
Visualising data is an important part of interpreting and refining data and making modelling decisions.
This part describes the tools available in Leapfrog Geo for visualising data. These tools are accessed via the
shape list and the shape properties panel:
The tools available depend on the type of object being displayed:

l
Drillholes can be displayed as lines or points and with the data associated with each segment. Data can
be filtered using the shape properties panel controls and applying query filters.
Multiple drillhole data tables can be displayed in the scene so that relationships between data in different
tables can be explored.
Some data can be displayed using a colour gradient, with the colourmap adjusted to enhance values of
interest. Discrete colourmaps can also be applied to view numeric data in groups.
Points data can be viewed as simple points or using the size of spheres to display associated values.
GIS data can be viewed in its native form, on the topography or as part of a custom topography view.
Displaying and Presenting Data describes how to display data and create scenes, movies and scene files for
presentation purposes.
Using the Shape List and Shape Properties Panel

Once objects have been added to the scene window, they will appear in the shape list, which can be treated as
a working set of objects:
You can use controls in the shape list and the shape properties panel to change the way those objects are
displayed. This is useful in interpreting data and making modelling decisions.
Changing how you view objects in the scene window does not change those objects in the project tree.
All objects in the shape list have a button ( ) that will remove the object from the scene. Most objects also
have a visibility button ( ) that can temporarily hide that object in the scene. It is often easier to make an
object temporarily invisible than to remove it from the list. Some objects have an edit button ( ) that you can
click to begin editing the object.
The view list is available for objects that can be displayed in different ways. For example, a lithology data table
may contain several columns and the column displayed can be selected from the view list:
Geological model, interpolant and distance function evaluations are also selected from the view list. See
Evaluating Objects.
The opacity slider controls the transparency of objects in the scene:
Using the Shape List and Shape Properties Panel | 51
Property buttons vary according to the type of object. For example, property buttons can show or hide the
triangles on a mesh, render points as spheres or display a surface clipped to a model boundary. You can
always find out what a button does by holding the cursor over the button:
You can display a legend for many objects, including lithologies. To do this, click the legend button in the shape
list:
To remove the legend from the scene, either click the legend button again or click the red X in the scene
window:
The shape properties panel adjacent to the shape list provides more detailed control of the appearance of the
selected object:
The properties available depend on the type of object, but the Slice mode appears for all objects. See Viewing
Data with the Slicer in the Scene for more information.
When a data table is selected in the shape list, you can use the controls in the shape properties panel to apply
filters to the data in the scene. If query filters are available for the selected object, they will be listed in the
Query filter list:
You can also filter the range of values displayed by ticking the Value filter box, then setting the upper and
lower limits of the range of data displayed:
If the data includes date information, you can use the Value filter option to restrict the display to a range of
dates.
You can select multiple objects in the shape list and change their display properties using the shape properties
panel. To do this, hold down the Shift key while clicking each object you wish to change:
Only controls common to the selected objects are available.

Click on a colour chip to change an objects colour. See Changing an Objects Display Colour.
If your organisation uses standard colour coding for category and numeric data, you can import colourmaps for
these data types. See Importing and Exporting Colourmaps.
Changing an Objects Display Colour | 53
Changing an Objects Display Colour

Many objects viewed in the scene are displayed using a single colour. To change the colour, add the object to
the scene window, then click on the colour chip in the shape list. A window will appear in which you can change
the colour:
You can:
l
Click and drag the ring to pick a colour, then select the darkness or lightness of the colour from the
triangle.
Click on the eyedropper tool ( ), then click on something elsewhere on the screen to select the colour of
that part of the screen.
Select a colour chip from the palette.
Set a random colour.
Enter specific values for the colour to use.
Changes made are automatically applied to the scene. The Revert button changes back to the colour assigned
when the window was first opened.
Changing a Colourmap
Some objects viewed in the scene are displayed using a colourmap based on continuous colour mapping or
discrete categories. Leapfrog Geo automatically generates a colourmap based on the data, but manually
altering the colourmap often helps in understanding the data. To change the colourmap for an object, add the
object to the scene. Click on the colourmap in the shape list and select Edit Colourmaps:
The Edit Colourmaps window will display the colourmap that is currently being used to display the data.
Changes you make in this window will be updated in the scene.
To save the currently displayed colourmap and return to the main window, click Close.
Clicking Revert All deletes all custom colourmaps and cannot be undone.
If your organisation uses standard colourmaps, you can import a colourmap, as described in Importing and
Exporting Colourmaps.
Editing a Continuous Colourmap

For a continuous colourmap, the values that lie outside the bounds are coloured with the last colour at the
appropriate end of the colourmap. The transformation of the colourmap can be changed by dragging the dots.
The scene will be updated to reflect the changes you make in this screen.
It can be helpful to view the histogram of the data when adjusting the curve points. Both the Properties
window and the Edit Colourmap window can be open at the same time.
If the Dynamic box is ticked, the gradient will be updated when the data is updated, such as when drillhole data
is appended. If the box is unticked, the values manually set for the Minimum and Maximum Limit values will
control the lower and upper bounds of the colourmap. Reducing the range of the upper and lower bounds is
useful if the bulk of the data points have values in a range much smaller than the overall range of the data. This
is common in skewed data.
The From Input Data button automatically adjusts the Minimum and Maximum Limit values so that the
colourmap would follow the actual data distribution of the input data. Click this button and see if these values
are adjusted.
Creating a Discrete Colourmap

When you create new colourmaps, there are two types to choose from: continuous and discrete.
Creating a Discrete Colourmap | 55
When you create a discrete colourmap, categories are defined and applied to the data displayed in the scene:
Click the Add button to add new categories. The scene will be updated to reflect the new categories:
Using a Colourmap to Display Dates

A colourmap can be used to display date information. If a date is displayed using a continuous colourmap, the
curve points represent the start and end dates:
If you use a discrete colourmap, you can use the colours to show the different stages of, for example, a drilling
campaign:
Importing and Exporting Colourmaps

If your organisation uses standard colour coding for category and numeric data, you can export colourmaps and
apply them in other projects.
Exporting a Colourmap | 57
Exporting a Colourmap
To export a colourmap, right-click on the data object and select Colours >Export:
If more than one colourmap is associated with the selected object, you will be prompted to choose from those
available. Click Export.
In the window that appears, navigate to the folder where you wish to save the colourmap. Enter a filename and
click Save. The colourmap will be saved in *.lfc format.
Importing a Colourmap
When you import a colourmap:
l
For category colourmaps, the existing colourmap will be overwritten.
For numeric colourmaps, the imported colourmap will be added to those already defined.
To import a colourmap, right-click on the data object and select Colours > Import. Navigate to the folder
containing the colourmap file and click Open.
If the object has more than one colourmap associated with it, you will be prompted to choose which one to
overwrite.
If the column you expected is not listed, check to see if you have selected the correct file. The columns
displayed are those that correspond to the type of data in the selected file (category or numeric).
Click Import.
Leapfrog Geo will map the information in the file to the information in the selected data column.
Displaying Drillholes
Viewing drillhole data in the scene is an important part of refining drillhole data and building a geological model.
Therefore, Leapfrog Geo has a number of different tools for displaying drillhole data that can help in making
drillhole data processing and modelling decisions.
Display drillhole data in the scene by dragging the Drillholes object into the scene. You can also drag individual
tables into the scene.
Once drillhole data is visible in the scene, click on a drillhole to view the data being displayed. You can also
display the data associated with each interval by clicking on the Show text button ( ) in the shape list. Here,
data display is enabled for two interval tables:
Displaying Drillholes as Lines or Cylinders

Drillholes can be displayed as lines or as cylinders. Here, the drillholes are displayed as flat lines:
The width of the lines is set in the shape properties panel.
Hiding Lithologies | 59
When the Make lines solid button ( ) is enabled, the drillhole data is displayed as cylinders and the property
that can be controlled is the Line radius:
Hiding Lithologies
When lithology tables are displayed, you can hide some of the lithologies to help make better sense of the
information in the scene. Click the Edit Colours button to open the lithology legend, then use the Show/Hide
buttons ( ) to determine what segments are displayed:
Hiding lithologies in this way only changes how the data is displayed in the scene. Another way of limiting
the data displayed is to use a query filter (see Building Query Filters), which can later be used in selecting a
subset of data for further processing.
Displaying a Legend
To display a legend in the scene, click the Show legend button (
) for the table:
The legend in the scene will be updated to reflect lithologies that are hidden in the scene when you click Edit
Colours and hide some lithologies.
Changing Colourmaps
To change the colours used to display lithologies, click on the Edit Colours button in the shape list. In the
window that appears, click on the colour chip for each lithology and change it as described in Changing an
Objects Display Colour.
You can also import a colourmap, which is described in Importing and Exporting Colourmaps.
Viewing Multiple Interval Tables | 61
Viewing Multiple Interval Tables

When viewing multiple interval tables, use the line and point size controls and the transparency settings to see
all the data at once. For example, here, the geology table has been made transparent to show the contaminant
intervals inside:
Selecting From Multiple Columns

When an interval table has more than one column of data, select the column to view from the view list:
Some columns are editable, in which case you can click on the Edit button ( ) to start editing the table:
Displaying Interval Data in the Scene

Drillholes can be displayed with the data associated with each segment. For example, in the scene below,
contaminant values are displayed along the drillhole:
To view data in this way, select the table in the shape list, then click on the Format Text button. In the Text
Format window, click Insert Column to choose from the columns available:
Displaying Points Data | 63
You can display multiple columns and add text:
Click OK to update the formatting in the scene. You can conceal the formatting in the scene by clicking on the
Show text button ( ) in the shape list:
Clear text formatting by clicking on the Format Text button, then on Clear.
Displaying Points Data

Points data can be displayed using a single flat colour, using a colour gradient (see Changing a Colourmap) or
using the points values. You can also import a colourmap, which is described in Importing and Exporting
Colourmaps.
As with drillholes, points data can be displayed as flat points or as spheres. When Make points solid button ( )
is enabled for points data, the data points are displayed as spheres. Here, the values are displayed as flat
points:
You can restrict the range of values displayed using the Value filter in the properties panel.
When using the spheres option, the points can be displayed using the values. To do this, the Radius values
list displays the columns available:
Select the column that will be used to determine the point size.
The Point radius control then determines the maximum point size displayed in the scene.
Displaying Surfaces | 65
Displaying Surfaces
Leapfrog Geo assigns different colours to each side of a surface.
A basic mesh will have an inside (coloured red) and an outside (coloured blue):
In the case of contact surfaces, each side will be assigned a lithology. Unknown will be used if multiple
lithologies are contacted. Contact surfaces can be displayed using the assigned lithologies or the younging
direction:
Veins can also be displayed coloured with the thickness values.

Surfaces that are part of a geological model or interpolant are, by default, displayed clipped to the model
boundary:
Disable the Clip to boundary button ( ) to view the surface unclipped.
Displaying Structural Data

There are several ways to view structural data. In the scene below, structural data is displayed using the Flat
colour option, with positive (red) and negative (blue) sides shown:
You can change the colours used to display the positive and negative sides using the controls in the shape list.
You can also display the data points as Thick disks, Flat disks or as Outlined flat disks. You can change the
Disk radius and the Disk size using the controls in the shape properties panel.
Another way of displaying structural data is to display the categories as different colours:
Viewing Data with the Slicer in the Scene | 67
You can change the colours used to display the different categories by clicking on Edit Colours in the shape
list.
You can also edit structural data in the scene. To do this, click on the Edit button ( ) in the shape list. See
Editing Structural Data.
Viewing Data with the Slicer in the Scene

When you draw a slice in the scene, how objects in the scene are displayed in relation to the slicer is controlled
in the properties panel:
The From Scene setting is the default; the object is sliced according to the properties set for the slicer.
By changing the Slice mode for objects in the scene, you can illustrate how a model has been constructed:
Viewing GIS Data

In Leapfrog Geo, there are three ways of looking at GIS data:
l
In its native form with height data or on a fixed elevation, if no height data is provided. Add the GIS data
object to the scene as you would any other object.
On the topography. Add the topography to the scene and select the GIS data from the dropdown list.
Combined with other data draped on the topography. See Creating Custom Topography Views.
The reason for having different ways of displaying GIS data is the difficulty posed by inconsistent height data.
Not all height data is correct or wanted. In practice, it is important for all the data to be consistent. For this
reason, a single elevation field is defined as part of the topography and available data is assigned heights from
this object. The native height information is available and can be used to define the height of layers in the
models.
Creating Custom Topography Views

In Leapfrog Geo, topography can be displayed with any of the GIS data and images available in the project.
With a custom view, you can display multiple GIS data objects, maps and aerial photos.
To create a custom view, add the topography object to the scene. Select New View from the GIS data
dropdown list:
The Edit GIS Views window will appear with a prompt asking you to enter a name for the new view:
Creating Custom Topography Views | 69
Enter a name for the view and click Create. The new view will be created in the Edit GIS Views window,
together with a list of Available layers. Click the Add button to move layers into the Current layers list and
use the Raise and Lower buttons to arrange them:
Use the transparency and point and line size controls to emphasise data.
Click Close. The topography will be displayed in the scene with the new view applied:
Evaluating Objects
Many objects in Leapfrog Geo can be displayed evaluated against geological models, interpolants and distance
functions. To do this, right-click on an object and select Evaluations:
Geological models can be evaluated on drillholes. See Back-flagging Drillhole Data.

Cross sections and fence sections can also be evaluated against surfaces. See Creating and Working with
Sections.
A window will appear listing all objects in the project that can be used for an evaluation. Once you have
selected one or more objects, click OK.
The evaluations will be added to the object in the project tree:
When you display objects in the scene, you can select the evaluations from the view list:
Defining Boundaries in a Leapfrog Geo Project

A newly-created project has only a basic set of X-Y-Z coordinates, and the coordinate system used by the
project is determined by the data imported to the project. It is not necessary to specify what coordinate system
is used; however, it is necessary to ensure that data you import into the project uses the same coordinate
system.
If you are importing data that uses different coordinate systems, you will need to process the data outside
of Leapfrog Geo so that it is using the same coordinate system.
Often the best way to set the coordinates for the project as a whole is to import a map or aerial photo. Adding
georeference data to a map will set the location of the map in three-dimensional space and set the coordinates
for the project. See Importing Maps and Images for more information.
An important consideration in defining the project space is setting the clipping boundary. See Setting a Clipping
Boundary.
Part of creating many objects in Leapfrog Geo is defining the basic rectangular boundary that defines the
objects extents. See Setting Object Extents.
Setting a Clipping Boundary

An important consideration in defining the project space is setting the clipping boundary.
The default clipping boundary in a new project file encompasses everything in the project and grows as more
data is added to the project. It is not necessary to set the clipping boundary. However, the clipping boundary
defines the limits of the X-Y coordinates for the region in which data will be imported and models built and so
defines the region in which calculations are made. Restricting the size of the clipping boundary limits the area
in which calculations are made and is especially important if you are working with a large dataset.
The best way to set the clipping boundary is using an imported map or aerial photo, as this provides a visual
reference that is helpful in working with data added to the project in the future. GIS data or drillhole data can
also be used to set the clipping boundary.
To set the clipping boundary, add to the scene the objects you wish to reference in setting the boundary. Rightclick on the Topographies folder or on the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder and select Set Clipping
Boundary. The Set Clipping Boundary window will be displayed, together with controls in the scene you can
use to resize the clipping boundary:
There are three ways to define the rectangular clipping boundary:
Enter the coordinates.

Select Enclose Object and choose from the list of objects in the project. The clipping boundary will be
updated using the selected object.
Use the controls that appear in the scene. The orange handle adjusts the centre of the clipping boundary
and the red handles adjusts its size.
When you have finished adjusting the clipping boundary, click OK.
If you are going to import elevation data and use it to create a topography, it is important to set the clipping
boundary before creating the topography. For example, here a map has been imported and a topography
(yellow) created from an elevation grid. The map is displayed draped on the topography:
The red arrows and orange handle show the clipping boundary, which has been allowed to expand to
encompass all data imported to the project. Because the topography was created before the clipping boundary
was set, all the data in the imported elevation grid has been used and the resulting topography is larger than
might be practical. Clearly, if the intention is to model within the area on the map, the clipping boundary should
be limited to the region indicated by the map.
If the map is the only object in the project, it can easily be used to set the clipping boundary by selecting
<Everything> from the Enclose Object list:
Defining a Topography | 73
This results in a clipping boundary that is limited to the extents of the map:
Once the clipping boundary has been set, further data imported into the project will be clipped to it. For
example, importing the elevation grid and using it to create a topography only after the clipping boundary has
been set to the map extents will result in a topography (with the map draped) that looks like this:
Once the clipping boundary has been set, a good next step is defining the topography. See Defining a
Topography.
Defining a Topography
It is not necessary to define a topography to model in Leapfrog Geo, but a defined topography can be used as
an upper boundary for all models built in the project.
A key advantage of defining a topography is that it provides consistent elevation data for objects imported to
and created in the project. The quality of elevation information can be poor compared to X- and Y-coordinates,
which can create problems when using objects to build a model. A topography can be created from the most
reliable elevation data, and other objects can have elevation set from this topography.
An important consideration when defining the topography is ensuring that it is large enough to encompass the
models you will be building in the project. If you create a small topography but then later create a model that
extends outside the topography, you will need to enlarge the topography, which can result in considerable
reprocessing of all objects in the project that use the topography as a boundary.
The topography can be created from:
l
An imported elevation grid
Points data, including the collars in imported drillhole data
Surfaces
GIS data
It is not necessary to decide on a single source of information, as information can be combined. Once the
topography has been defined, additional height data can be added by right-clicking on the topography and
selecting from the options available. See Adding Height Data to the Topography for more information. You can
add and remove data as required.
See:
l
If you dont have any data suitable for creating a topography, you can set a fixed elevation. See Setting a Fixed
Elevation.
Once defined, you can export the topography as a mesh or as an elevation grid. See:
l
Exporting a Mesh

There are two ways to create the topography from an elevation grid:
l
Right-click on the Topographies folder and select New Topography > Import Elevation Grid. Import
the grid as described in Importing an Elevation Grid.
Import the grid using the Meshes folder and then right-click on the Topographies folder and select New
Topography > From Surface.
Enter a name for the topography and click OK. A hyperlink to the elevation grid will appear in the
Topographies folder under the defined topography.
Once the topography has been defined, additional height data can be added by right-clicking on the topography
and selecting from the options available. See Adding Height Data to the Topography for more information.

To create the topography from a surface, points or GISdata, first import the data into the project.
l
Import surfaces into the Meshes folder.
Import drillhole data into the project or points data into the Points folder.
Import GIS vector data into the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder.
Next, right-click on the Topographies folder and select one of the New Topography options. A list of suitable
objects available in the project will be displayed. Select the required object and click OK. Enter a name for the
topography and click OK. A hyperlink to the source object will appear in the Topographies folder under the
defined topography.
Once the topography has been defined, additional height data can be added by right-clicking on the topography
and selecting from the options available. See Adding Height Data to the Topography for more information.
See also Changing Topography Settings.
Setting a Fixed Elevation

If you dont have any data suitable for creating a topography, you can set a fixed elevation. To do this, rightclick on the Topographies folder and select New Topography > Fixed Elevation. In the window that
appears, enter a value for the elevation and click OK. Enter a name for the new topography and click OK.
Adding Height Data to the Topography | 75
The new topography will appear in the project tree under the Topographies folder.
Once a topography has been defined, the only way to set a fixed elevation is to remove the objects that have
been used to define the topography. To do this, right-click on the hyperlinked object and click Remove. You
will then be able to set a fixed elevation for the topography.
Adding Height Data to the Topography

When creating the topography, it is not necessary to decide on a single source of information, as information
can be combined. Once the topography has been defined, additional height data can be added by right-clicking
on the topography and selecting from the options available:
For points, surfaces and GISvector data, you will be prompted to select from the data sources available in the
project. For an elevation grid, see Importing an Elevation Grid.
All data objects used to define the topography will appear under the topography, hyperlinked to their parent
objects:
When you have added data to the topography, you may need to enlarge the topography extents. See Changing
Topography Settings.
To remove data objects from the topography, either:
l
Delete the object from the topography. To do this, right-click on the hyperlinked object and click Remove.
Delete the object from the project. If you choose this option, consider carefully the effects on other
objects in the project, as once an object is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
When the topography is defined from multiple objects, you can set the resolution of the topography by doubleclicking on it. See Changing Topography Settings.
Changing Topography Settings

When the topography is created from points or GIS data or when the topography is created by combining data,
you can change its boundary and resolution and apply a trend. To do this, double-click on the topography in the
project tree. The Edit Topography window will appear:
Changing the Size of the Topography

In the General tab, you can change the topography extents. Use the controls in the scene or enter the required
values in the Bounding Box fields.
Changing the Resolution of the Topography

The resolution of the topography depends on how it was created.
l
When the topography is created from a single mesh, the resolution of the topography is set from the
resolution of the mesh and can only be changed when the mesh is imported. If you wish to change the
resolution of the topography, you must first add more height data to the topography. See Adding Height
Data to the Topography.
When the topography is created by setting a fixed elevation, the resolution cannot be set.
When the topography is created from points or GIS data or when the topography is created from combining
data, you can set its resolution in the Edit Topography window.
When you set a specific Surface resolution without enabling the Adaptive option, the triangles used will be
the same size for the whole topography. When you enable the Adaptive option, the resolution of the
topography will be affected by the availability and density of real data. See Surface Resolution in Leapfrog Geo
for more information on these settings.
Applying a Trend to the Topography | 77
Applying a Trend to the Topography

In the Trend tab, you can apply a trend to the topography:
See Adjusting Surfaces for more information.
Displaying Topography in the Scene Window

To display the topography in the scene window, either:
l
Right-click on the topography in the project tree and select View Object.
Click on the topography object and drag it into the scene.
The topography will be displayed in the scene window and in the shape list:
The topography object in the shape list provides additional controls that can be used to change the way the
topography is displayed and highlight features of interest. For example, selecting an imported map from the
dropdown list results in it being displayed draped onto the topography:
All GIS data objects in the project can be displayed in this manner. You can also create custom views by
combining multiple GIS data objects with an image. See Creating Custom Topography Views for more
information.
Projecting Collars Onto the Topography

If the drillhole collars are not lying on the topography, Leapfrog Geo can make adjustments to the collar depth
values so that the collars lie on the topography. This adjustment is reversible.
To make this adjustment, right-click on the collars table and tick the box for the Project Collars Onto
Topography option. If you then open the collar table, the depth values will reflect the topography. Right-click
on the collar table and untick the box for Project Collars Onto Topography to return to the uncorrected collar
depth values.
Setting Object Extents | 79
Setting Object Extents

Part of creating many objects in Leapfrog Geo is defining the basic rectangular boundary that defines the
objects extents. There are generally two options for defining an objects extents:
l
The first option is to define extents that are independent of other objects in the project. You can do this by
entering coordinates or adjusting controls in the scene to set the size and shape of the extents. The new
objects extents are fixed to the specified size. This is a good choice if, for example, you are building a
geological model from a map and wish to define the model extents based on information on the map.
The second option is to define extents based on other objects in the project. This is done by selecting the
other object from the Enclose Object dropdown list that appears in many Leapfrog Geo screens.
For both methods, the new objects extents are fixed to the selected size. Using the Enclose Object list
does not link the two objects, it is simply using the X-Y-Z coordinates of the original object as the basis for
the new extents.
For example, here, a geological models extents could be defined using the lithology segments used as the
base lithology:
When creating some objects, you have the option of sharing extents with another object. This is the case with
editable meshes ( ), where you can choose whether the mesh has its own extents or shares extents with
other objects in the project. Shared extents are updated when the original objects extents are updated.
If you are unsure about relationships between objects, expand them in the project tree to view more
information. Here, two meshes have been defined from the same set of points:
The first mesh shares its extents with another object in the project, which is indicated by the hyperlink. The
second mesh has no hyperlink; it has its own extents that are not updated by other objects in the project.
Geological models and interpolants are created with a basic set of rectangular extents that can then be refined
by adding lateral extents created from other data in the project. See Modifying the Model Boundary for more
information. Geological models can also have a base created from data in the project. For example, lithology
contacts can be used to define the base of a model.
Importing and Working with Drillhole Data

Drillhole data forms the basis for creating models in Leapfrog Geo. Because drillhole data often contains errors
that reduce the reliability of a model, Leapfrog Geo has tools that help you to identify and correct errors in the
data and work with the data
In Leapfrog Geo, drillhole data defines the physical 3D shape of drillholes. It is made up of:
l
A collar table, containing information on the location of the drillhole.
A survey table, containing information that describes the deviation of each drillhole.
At least one interval table, containing information on measurements such as lithology, date or any
numeric or textual values. An interval table must also include collar IDs that correspond to those in the
collar table and sample start and end depth.
A screens table can also be imported, if available.

When a project is first created, the only options available via the Drillhole Data folder are for importing data.
See Importing Drillhole Data for more information on these options.
Once data has been added to the project, a Drillholes object will be created that serves as a container for the
tables imported:
When there are errors in the data, the relevant table will be marked with a red X ( ). See Correcting Drillhole
Data Errors for more information on fixing data errors.
Leapfrog Geo also has tools for creating new lithology data columns from existing columns in order to solve
problems with the drillhole data. See Processing Drillhole Data for more information.
You can open each table by double-clicking on the table ( ). The table will be displayed and you can make
changes. See Using the Table Dialog.
See Displaying Drillholes in Visualising Data for information about displaying drillhole data in the scene.
With Leapfrog Geo, you can also plan drillholes and evaluate them against any model in the project. See
Planning Drillholes for more information.
Importing Drillhole Data

Drillhole data can be imported from:
l
Files stored on your computer or a network location. This process is described below.
From any database that runs an ODBC interface. See Selecting the ODBC Data Source.
From an acQuire database. See Connecting to an acQuire Database.
For each of these options, once the data source is selected, the process of importing drillhole data is the same.
Leapfrog Geo expects drillhole data that is stored in a collar table, a survey table and at least one interval table.
Each project can have only one collar file and survey table, but multiple interval tables can be imported.
Leapfrog Geo imports tables from text files in CSV, ASCII and text formats. See Expected Drillhole Data
Format for more detailed information on the information required in each file type.
To import drillhole data, right-click on the Drillhole Data folder and select Import Drillholes. The Import
Drillhole Data window will appear:
For the Collar, click on the Browse button to locate the collar file.
When a collar file is added to the Import Drillhole Data window, Leapfrog Geo will look for interval tables
with names such as lithology or geology in the same location and will add them to the Interval Tables
list. If an interval table file is not automatically added to the list, click Add and browse for the required file.
You can also add any screens to import by clicking on the Screens Browse button.
In the screen below, a collar file, a survey file and two interval tables have been selected for import:
Clicking on Import starts the process of importing data. Leapfrog Geo will display a series of windows, one for
each file, and will attempt to match the data found in the files with the columns expected, based on the header
row in each file. Progress in working through the files is shown at the top of the window:
The file currently displayed is shown in bold.
Importing Drillhole Data | 83
For *.csv files that use characters other than the comma as the separator, you can specify the delimiter,
comment leader, quote and decimal characters in the Import Drillhole Data window. Click on CSV
characters to enter the characters used in the data files:
The row at the top of the table indicates the data type to which Leapfrog Geo will assign each column:
Click at the top of a column to view the column assignments available. The columns highlighted below are the
column types required for the collar table:
Each type of table being imported will have different column assignments available, but all table types will
display:
l
The categories columns can be assigned to (top of the list)
The option to not import the column
The required columns, e.g. Hole Id, East (X), North (Y) and Elev (Z) for the collar table
Any optional columns, e.g. Max Depth and Trench
The option to select a custom name
If the header row for a column cannot be matched, Leapfrog Geo will mark the column as Not Imported and
you can select from the column assignments available. If you choose not to import a column then wish to do so
later, you can add it later using the Import Column option. See Importing Columns.
Sometimes it is easier to work with the Column Summary. For example, if there are multiple columns you
wish to assign as the same data type, you can easily do so using the Column Summary:
If you wish to import all columns, click on the Import All Columns button, then check that all columns have
been correctly mapped.
If the data contains date and time information and the date and time format is not detected, click on Date and
Time Formats to reveal more information:
If the date and time format you wish to use is not among the options, you can create a custom format.
For each file, check the column mapping and click Next to proceed to the next step. If any of the information
Leapfrog Geo expects is missing, an error message will appear. Return to the table and correct the problem
described.
Once you have checked the last file, click on Finish. Once Leapfrog Geo has imported the data, it will appear in
the project tree under a new Drillholes object.
See Correcting Drillhole Data Errors.
Expected Drillhole Data Format

Drillhole data can be imported from files stored on your computer or a network location, from any database that
runs an ODBC interface or from an acQuire database. Once the data source is selected, the process of
importing drillhole data is similar for each data source.
See Selecting the ODBC Data Source for information on using the ODBC interface.
See Connecting to an acQuire Database for information on importing from an acQuire database.
Leapfrog Geo imports tables from text files in CSV, ASCII and text formats.
The Collar Table | 85
The Collar Table

The collar table should contain five columns:
l
A drillhole identifier
The location of the drillhole in X, Y and Z coordinates
The maximum depth of the drillhole
A collar table can also contain a trench column, and collars marked as trenches will be desurveyed in a manner
different from other drillholes.
The Hole ID is used to associate data in different tables with a single drillhole. The Hole ID for a drillhole must
be identical in all tables in order for data to be associated with that drillhole. Inconsistencies in the way
drillholes are identified are common sources of errors.
The maximum depth column is optional. If it is present, is used to validate the data imported for the interval
tables. The maximum depth specified in the collar table is often a planned quantity, whereas the interval table
records actual measurements. For this reason, Leapfrog Geo has an option for fixing the maximum depth value
in the collar table to match the data in an interval table.
If maximum depth information is not included in a collar file, Leapfrog Geo will determine it from the maximum
depth sampled as indicated by data in the interval tables.
Interval Tables
For interval tables, Leapfrog Geo expects, at minimum, four columns:
l
Start/from and end/to depths
A column of measurements
If a drillhole ID in an interval table does not correspond to one in the collar file, the file can still be imported but
the interval table will contain errors.
Supported column types are:
l
Lithology columns containing lithologic data, which can be used for geological modelling.
Numeric columns containing numeric values, which can be used for interpolating data.
Category columns, which is text representing categories such as company, geologist, or mineralisation.
Text columns containing text data that is not categorical, such as comments. Text columns are not
validated when imported.
Date columns containing date data. Custom date and timestamps formats are supported.
The Screens Table

For the screens table, Leapfrog Geo expects a minimum of four columns:
l
A value column
The Survey Table

For the survey table, Leapfrog Geo expects a minimum of four columns:
l
Depth, dip and azimuth values
See Changing Survey Table Options for more information on the drillhole desurveying algorithms used in
Leapfrog Geo.
Selecting the ODBC Data Source

To import drillhole data directly from any database that uses an ODBC interface, right-click on the Drillhole
Data folder and select Import Drillhole Data via ODBC. The Select ODBC Data Source window will
appear:
Enter the information supplied by your database administrator and click OK.
Once the data source is selected, the importation process is similar to that described in Importing Drillhole
Data.
Connecting to an acQuire Database

There are two options for connecting to an acQuire database:
l
Create a new connection. To do this, right-click on the Drillhole Data folder and select Import Drillhole
Data via acQuire > New Selection. In the window that appears, choose whether to connect using
ODBC or DAP. Select the server and click Connect. Next, enter the login details supplied by your
database administrator.
Create a connection from an existing selection file. Right-click on the Drillhole Data folder and select
Import Drillhole Data via acQuire > Existing Selection. Navigate to the location where the selection
file is stored and open the file.
Once connected to the database, you will be able to select the required data. When you have finished
specifying the selection, click OK to import the data. The importation process is similar to that described in
Importing Drillhole Data.
Once the drillhole data has been loaded, you can:
l
Import additional interval tables. See Importing Interval Tables.
Appending drillhole data. See Appending Drillholes.
Saving a Selection | 87
Reload drillhole data. See Reloading Drillhole Data.
Saving a Selection
Saving a selection saves the acQuire database in its current state. You can use a selection to import the same
set of drillhole data in new Leapfrog Geo projects.
To save an acQuire selection, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select Save Selection.
You will be prompted for a filename and location.
Appending Drillholes
If drillhole data is stored in multiple files or new drillhole data is available, you can import other files into the
project and add them to the existing drillhole data. To do this, right-click on the Drillholes object and select
Append Drillholes.
Append drillhole data when you have new drillholes or wish to add extra length to existing drillholes. If you
wish to refresh drillhole data, overwriting all existing drillhole data, use the Reload Drillholes option.
The Append Drillholes window will be displayed. Appending drillhole data is similar to importing the original
data (see Importing Drillhole Data):
l
If the drillhole data was loaded from a file on your computer or a network location, you will be asked to
specify the file locations. Step through the files, checking the Column Summary for each file to ensure
that the correct information will be imported, then click Finish to add the new files.
If the interval table is stored in an ODBC database, you will be prompted to connect to the database. See
Selecting the ODBC Data Source.
If your drillhole data is stored in an acQuire database, you will be prompted to connect to the database.
See Connecting to an acQuire Database.
Importing Interval Tables

Interval tables that have not been imported during the drillhole data import process can be added to the project
at any time. To add an interval table, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select from the
options available:
l
If the interval table is stored in a file on your computer or a network location, select Import From File >
Interval Values. Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the file location, and then will display the data in
the file in the Import Interval window.
If the interval table is stored in an ODBC database, select Import From ODBC > Interval Values. You
will be prompted to select the data source. See Selecting the ODBC Data Source.
If your drillhole data is stored in an acQuire database, select Import From acQuire > Interval Values.
Columns required are:

l
A column of measurements
See Expected Drillhole Data Format for more information on the supported column types.
Select the required columns and assign the data type for each column. Click Finish to import the file, which will
appear under the Drillholes object.
Importing Columns
Columns of an interval table that have not been imported during the drillhole data import or that are stored in a
separate file can be added to the table at any time. To do this, right-click on the interval table in the project tree
and select New Column > Import Column.
Importing a column is similar to importing interval tables themselves. Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the
file location, and then will display the data in the file in the Add Column To Table window. Select as many
columns to import as required and assign the appropriate data type. Before finishing, check the Column
Summary to ensure that the correct information will be imported.
It is not necessary to re-import any columns that are already part of the project. The drillhole ID and To and
From data columns, however, will be used to check the validity of the new column against existing data.
Click Finish to import the new column.
Importing Screens
Screens that have not been imported during the drillhole data import process can be added to the project at any
time. To do this, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select Import From File > Screens
or Import From ODBC > Screens.
When importing from a file, Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the file location, and then will display the data
in the file in the Import Screen window.
When importing from ODBC, you will first be prompted to select the data source. See Selecting the ODBC
Data Source.
l
A value column
A Leapfrog Geo project can have only one screens table.
Importing Point Values Down Drillholes

To import a set of points on drillholes, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select Import
From File > Point Values or Import From ODBC > Point Values.
When importing from a file, Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the file location and then will display the data
in the file in the Import Depth Points window.
Data Source.
l
Depth
Importing Downhole Structural Data | 89
Importing Downhole Structural Data

Leapfrog Geo supports structural measurements in .csv or text formats. This topic describes importing
downhole structural data tables. Structural data tables that include location information can also be imported to
the Structural Data folder. See Importing Structural Data.
To import a set of structural data on drillholes, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select
Import From File > Structural Data or Import From ODBC > Structural Data.
When importing from a file, Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the file location and then will display the data
in the file in the Import Structural Data window.
Data Source.
Leapfrog Geo expects columns describing the drillhole identifier, the depth and the structural orientation.
Structural orientation can be specified using either dip and azimuth or alpha and beta.
Match the values in the file to the required column headers, then click Finish to import the file. The table will
If the structural orientation is specified using alpha and beta, the reference line from which the beta is measured
can be the bottom or top of the drillhole. When the table is imported, the default setting is Bottom of core. To
change this, double-click on the structural data table in the project tree. Next, click on the Compatibility tab to
change the Beta reference mark setting to Top of core:
Using the Table Dialog

To view the contents of a data table, double-click on it in the project tree. The Table window will appear:
You can enter information in the Query field to filter the data. See Building Query Filters for more information on
how to build and use queries.
If the Ignored column is ticked, then Leapfrog Geo completely ignores that row, as though it had been deleted.
This is useful for suppressing erroneous data from being processed. If a hole in the collar table is ignored, then
all other data associated with that hole (e.g. surveys and interval measurements) are also ignored.
Collar tables have a trench column that indicates whether or not the drillhole is from a trench. When the trench
column is ticked for a drillhole, the trench will be desurveyed in a different manner from other drillholes. See
Changing Survey Table Options for more information.
Survey tables have a Compatibility tab that provides options for changing the desurveying method for the
survey table as a whole. See Changing Survey Table Options for more information.
Drillhole Desurveying in Leapfrog Geo

Drillhole desurveying computes the geometry of a drillhole in three-dimensional space based on the data
contained in the survey table.
Under ideal conditions, the drillhole path follows the original dip and azimuth established at the top of the
drillhole. Usually, though, the path deflects away from the original direction as a result of layering in the rock,
variation in the hardness of the layers and the angle of the drill bit relative to those layers. The drill bit will be
able to penetrate softer layers more easily than harder layers, resulting in a preferential direction of drill bit
deviation.
There are a number of paths a drillhole could take through available survey measurements, but the physical
constraints imposed by drilling are more likely to produce smoother paths. Selecting the desurveying method
that gives the best likely approximation of the actual path of the drillhole will ensure that subsequent modelling
is as accurate as possible.
Spherical Arc Approximation | 91
Leapfrog Geo implements three algorithms for desurveying drillholes.
Spherical Arc Approximation

The default algorithm used in Leapfrog Geo is spherical arc approximation, which is sometimes referred to as
the minimum curvature algorithm. Downhole distances are desurveyed exactly as distances along a circular
arc:
The algorithm matches the survey at the starting and end positions exactly and the curvature is constant
between these two measurements. At the survey points, the direction remains continous and, therefore, there
are no unrealistic sharp changes in direction.
If you wish to use spherical arc approximation, there is no need to change any settings.
Raw Tangent
The raw tangent algorithm assumes the drillhole maintains the direction given by the last survey measurement
until the next new measurement is reached:
This implies that the drillhole makes sharp jumps in direction whenever a measurement is taken, which is
unlikely, except when the drillhole is being used to define a trench.
To use the raw tangent algorithm for a drillhole, double-click on the collar table in the project tree. Tick the
trench box for the drillholes you wish to desurvey using the raw tangent algorithm. See Using the Table Dialog.
Balanced Tangent
The balanced tangent algorithm uses straight lines but attempts to improve the accuracy of the raw tangent
algorithm by assigning equal weights to the starting and end survey measurements:
It is an improvement on the raw tangent algorithm but still suffers from an unrealistic discontinuity in the
drillhole path. It is, however, a better approximation of the overall drillhole path and is reasonably accurate
when the spacing between measurements is small.
To use the balanced tangent algorithm, double-click on the survey table in the project tree. Click on the
Compatibility tab and change the Desurveying method.
Changing Survey Table Options

The Compatibility tab has two options for changing the way survey table data is handled in Leapfrog Geo:
Changing Survey Table Options | 93
By default, Leapfrog Geo assumes that negative dip values point down. If this is not the case, untick the
Negative survey dip points down option.
When drillhole data is imported, the Desurveying method applied is Leapfrog spherical arc approximation.
The Balanced tangent algorithm option is compatible with Vulcan and Minesight. See Drillhole Desurveying
in Leapfrog Geo for more information about these options.
Correcting Drillhole Data Errors

Leapfrog Geo automatically identifies and flags common drillhole data errors when drillhole data tables are
imported. There are three ways Leapfrog Geo marks tables that contain conflicts or errors:
l
Tables containing errors that mean data cannot be used for processing are marked with a red X ( ).
These errors can be corrected by opening the Database Errors window, which is described in Correcting
Drillhole Data Errors in Leapfrog Geo.
Numeric data columns with non-numeric values are marked with a red X ( ), which means that the rules
that are used to handle non-numeric and negative values need to be reviewed. If a drillhole has intervals
that contain non-numeric and negative values, the drillhole cannot be used for further processing until the
rules are verified, which is described in Handling Special Values in Drillhole Data.
Tables containing warnings are marked with a yellow exclamation mark ( ). Affected drillholes can be
used for further processing, but the information in the warning can indicate that the data requires further
attention. For example, if a warning indicates there is data missing for a drillhole defined in the collar table,
it may be that a drillhole has been duplicated or that not all required data files have been loaded. Warnings
are listed along with table errors in the Database Errors window.
Until errors are corrected, the rows that contain those errors are excluded for all processing that uses the table,
including viewing in the scene. For example, if the ID for a collar position contains an invalid coordinate, that
collar will not be displayed in the scene as its location is not known. Likewise, any processing will ignore data
associated with this drillhole.
It is worth correcting errors as soon as possible, as correcting them later can result in significant recomputation
time.
When a table contains errors and warnings, only the errors will be apparent in the project tree view.
However, all errors and warnings relevant to a particular table will be displayed in the Database Errors
window.
There are two approaches to correcting errors in drillhole data:
l
Correct the data in the primary source. Export the errors as described in Exporting Drillhole Data Errors.
Then, when the errors have been corrected, reload the drillhole data as described in Reloading Drillhole
Data.
Correct the data in Leapfrog Geo. If you need a record of corrected errors, first export the errors as
described in Exporting Drillhole Data Errors. This must be done first, as once errors have been corrected
in Leapfrog Geo, they cannot be exported, as they no longer exist. Then correct errors as described in
Correcting Drillhole Data Errors in Leapfrog Geo.
Exporting Drillhole Data Errors

There are two options for exporting drillhole data errors:
l
Export all errors in the drillhole data set.
Export only the errors from a single table.
Correcting Drillhole Data Errors in Leapfrog Geo | 95
To export all errors in the drillhole data, right-click on the Drillholes object and select Export Errors. The
Export Drillhole Errors window will appear:
The list shows the files that will be created, one for each table that contains errors. Choose a folder where the
files will be saved, then enter a Base file name, which will be added to the front of each file name.
Click Export to export the error files.
To export errors from a single table, right-click on that table and select Export Errors. Choose a location where
the file will be saved and click Save.
Correcting Drillhole Data Errors in Leapfrog Geo

If you require a list of errors, select the Export Errors option before fixing them.
If you require a record of the errors in the drillhole data, export the errors as described in Exporting Drillhole
Data Errors before starting to correct the errors in Leapfrog Geo.
To correct errors in drillhole data, right-click on the affected table and select Fix Errors. The Database Errors
window will appear. Expand the list to view the details of the selected error:
When a row that contains an error is selected, a red box indicates the source of the error.
Errors are automatically grouped by Type when the Database Errors window is opened. If there are many
errors, you may find it useful to view them grouped by Table or HoleID. You can change the size of the
Database Errors window and the columns in the table to view more information easily. When you have
finished fixing errors, click the OK button. Leapfrog Geo will then update the database.
There are many possible sources of errors. Some useful techniques for fixing errors are described below.
Checking for Missing Files

Sometimes data is spread across several files and not all files have been imported. When you have many
errors in freshly imported data, make sure that all necessary files have been imported.
Ignoring Errors
Ticking the Ignored box for a row results in that row being omitted from all processing, as though it has been
deleted.
Modifying Data
You can double click on any cell to edit its content, except for the id column. If the cell you wish to edit is
already selected, press the space bar to start editing.
Changes made to data in this way are immediately saved to the database.
Fixing Collar Maxdepths

If there is a drillhole segment that falls beyond the maxdepth defined in the collar table, a Collar maxdepth
exceeded error will be reported. To fix this error, click on the Fix Collar Maxdepths button. This results in the
collar table being updated with a maxdepth value that reflects the data in the interval tables.
Replacing All | 97
Replacing All
With Replace All, you can replace an incorrect value that occurs multiple times in a column. To do this, click
the Replace All button. In the window that appears, select the column to search and the Find and Replace
with values.
Click OK to make the changes.
Replacing a Selection
With Replace Selection, you can select a number of row and replace values in a selected column with a
single value. To do this, use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select the rows you wish to edit, then click the Replace
All button. In the window that appears, select the Column and enter the Replace with value.
Click OK to make the changes.
Handling Special Values in Drillhole Data

Assay data often contains special values to represent different situations, such as grade values that are below
a detection limit, cores that have been lost or segments that were not sampled. In addition, it is not uncommon
for a drillhole to contain some intervals that have no values.
When drillhole data tables and points data are imported, Leapfrog Geo will mark columns containing nonnumeric special values and missing intervals so that you can review these missing and non-numeric values
and determine how Leapfrog Geo will handle them. For example, here numeric data columns that contain errors
are marked with a red X:
Handling Special Values in Drillhole Data | 99
To review these errors, double-click on the column. The Invalid Value Handling window will appear:
Leapfrog Geo will automatically set missing and non-numeric intervals to be omitted from further processing.
Negative values are automatically set to keep. To change the Action, select another action from the dropdown
list:
l
Select replace to enter a numeric value to be used for further processing.
Select keep to use a negative value in further processing.
For non-numeric and negative values, all values are initially treated as a single rule. However, if values have
different meanings, you can define specific rules to determine how each value is handled. To do this, click on
the Add Rule button. The window that appears will show the values present in the data:
To define a new rule for a specific value, select that value in the list, then tick the box for The value I want is
not in the list. Enter the Value and click OK. In the Invalid Value Handling window, the value will be listed
separately and you can choose the Action to apply.
Once you have reviewed the rules that will be applied to the column, tick the These rules have been
reviewed box and click OK. The rules will be applied and used in further processing.
When you open a data table, the original values will be displayed. In all further processing of that data, the
assigned special values will be used.
Processing Drillhole Data

Once imported and corrected, drillhole data usually requires further processing before any models are built. Use
the techniques described in Displaying Drillholes to aid in making decisions on what further processing is
required.
Often, selecting a small portion of intervals can be achieved using a query filter (see Building Query Filters). In
some cases, however, you may wish to composite data to focus on a single unit. There may also be issues
with how drillhole data has been recorded; for example, two units have been catalogued as one, or a single unit
may be divided into multiple units.
Leapfrog Geo has a number of tools for processing drillhole data, including:
l
Compositing Category Data. Sometimes unit boundaries are poorly defined, with fragments of other
lithologies within the lithology of interest. This can result in very small segments near the edges of the
lithology of interest. Modelling the fine detail is not always necessary, and so compositing can be used to
smooth these boundaries.
Compositing Numeric Data. Compositing numeric data takes unevenly-spaced drillhole data and turns it
into regularly-spaced data, which is then interpolated.
Grouping Lithologies. The group lithologies tool lets you define a new unit to which existing units are
added. For example, a sandstone deposit might appear in an interval table as poorly-sorted and wellsorted units. The group lithologies tool lets you group both units into a single sandstone unit.
Splitting Lithologies. Lithology units may be incorrectly grouped, which can become apparent when you
display drillholes in the scene. The split lithologies tool lets you create new units by selecting from
intervals displayed in the scene.
Selecting Intervals. If the lithologies in a column are poorly sorted, you can display the column in the
scene and use the interval selection tool to work with all the segments and sort them into new units.
Creating an Overlaid Lithology Column. You may have two versions of an interval column, one that
contains draft data and one that contains the final version. The final version may contain gaps, which can
be filled in using the draft version. The overlaid lithology tool lets you combine the two columns to create a
new column.
Creating a New Category Column from Numeric Data. When you have numeric data you wish to use with
the lithology and category modelling tools, you can convert the numeric data to a category column.
Back-flagging Drillhole Data. Evaluating geological models on drillholes creates a new lithology table
containing the lithologies from the selected model.
Each of these tools creates a new interval table or creates a new column in an existing interval table,
preserving the original data. New tables and columns can be used as the basis for new models in the project
and can be incorporated into existing models using From Other Contacts options. When a new table is
created, you can view it in the scene along with the original table to see the differences between the processed
and the unprocessed data.
If you are working with columns in different interval tables, you can create a new merged table that includes
columns from these different tables. Columns created in Leapfrog Geo can be included in a merged table. See
Creating a New Merged Drillhole Data Table.
Compositing Category Data | 101
Compositing Category Data

Sometimes unit boundaries are poorly defined, with fragments of other lithologies within the lithology of
interest. This can result in very small segments near the edges of the lithology of interest. Modelling the fine
detail is not always necessary, and so compositing can be used to smooth these boundaries.
In Leapfrog Geo, you can composite category data in two ways:
l
Composite the drillhole data directly. This creates a new interval table that can be used to build models,
and changes made to the table will be reflected in all models based on that table. This process is
described below.
Composite the points used to create depositional, erosional or intrusional contact surfaces in a geological
model. See Defining Contact Surfaces.
Drillhole data is composited from the Composites folder, which is in the project tree as part of the Drillholes
object. To create a category composite, right-click on the Composites folder and select New Category
Composite. You will be prompted to select from the category columns available in the drillhole data. Next, the
New Composited Table window will appear, showing the options for sorting intervals in the selected column:
Compositing category data sorts segments into three categories:

l
Primary. This is the unit of interest. In the case of compositing on intrusional contact surfaces, this will
be the interior/intrusive lithology.
Ignored. These are units that are, generally, younger than the unit of interest and should, therefore, be
ignored in generating contact surfaces.
Exterior. These are units that occur outside of the unit of interest. For an intrusive lithology, other
lithologies the intrusion contacts should be classified as Exterior.
Unspecified intervals can be handled as Ignored, Primary or Exterior.

The additional compositing parameters determine how ignored segments flanked by interior or exterior
segments are handled and the length of segments that will be filtered. Each of these settings is discussed
below.
Click OK to create the table. Once you have created a composited table, you can edit it by right-clicking on it
and selecting Edit Composited Table.
Converting Ignored Segments

The Convert enclosed ignored segments setting determines how ignored segments are handled when they
are flanked by either two interior segments or two exterior segments. If Convert enclosed ignored segments
is enabled, Leapfrog Geo will convert enclosed ignored segments to match the surrounding segments. In cases
where an ignored segment does not lie between two interior or exterior segments, it will remain ignored.
If you wish to set a maximum size for ignored enclosed segments, tick the Shorter than box and set the
maximum length.
If Convert enclosed ignored segments is disabled, this processing does not occur and ignored segments
are never converted. When an intrusive contact surface is created, this setting is disabled by default.
For example, this scene shows two ignored segments that are flanked by the unit of interest. Because
Convert enclosed ignored segments is disabled, the segments remain ignored:
Converting Ignored Segments | 103
Enabling Convert enclosed ignored segments results in the segments being converted to the Primary unit:
Enabling Shorter than and setting it to 4 results in the shorter segment being converted to the Primary unit
and the longer segment remaining Ignored:
Zooming out, we can see that the ignored segments at the top of the drillholes have not been converted:
Filtering Interior and Exterior Short Segments

The Filter primary segments and Filter exterior segments parameters determine how short a segment must
be before it is composited:
l
Short Exterior segments flanked by Primary segments will be converted to Primary segments.
Short Primary segments flanked by Exterior segments will be converted to Exterior segments.
When the value is set the zero, no segments will be converted.

To see how these parameters can smooth the shape of a unit of interest, lets look at a series of drillholes
where we wish to create an intrusion boundary based on the red segments. Short segments are highlighted in
the uncomposited intervals:
An intrusion generated from these uncomposited intervals will have more detail than is necessary for
modelling. However, when compositing settings are applied and the short intervals are converted, we can see
that the intrusion boundary is more geologically reasonable:
Compositing Numeric Data | 105
Compositing Numeric Data

Compositing numeric data takes unevenly-spaced drillhole data and turns it into regularly-spaced data, which
is then interpolated.
Compositing regularises numeric data by applying two parameters, Compositing Length and Minimum
Coverage, and applying these parameters in the following stages:
l
Drillholes are divided into composite intervals. The Compositing Length determines the length of each
composite interval, and the Minimum Coverage value determines whether or not lengths shorter than the
Compositing Length are retained for further processing.
Composite values are calculated for each composite interval. This is simply the average of all numeric
drillhole data that falls within the composite interval.
Composite points are generated at the centre of each composite interval from the composite values. If the
Minimum Coverage threshold is not reached, no composite point will be generated.
For example, the following illustration shows how the Compositing Length and Minimum Coverage values
can be applied in dividing two drillholes into composite intervals. In both cases, the Compositing Length is set
to 10.
In the first example, any intervals at least 1m long (10%) will be retained, so both the 2m and 7m lengths are
retained. In the second example, intervals must be at least 5m long (50%) to be retained, and so the 2m interval
in the first drillhole is removed.
Omitted segments are drillhole segments for which no replacement action have been assigned in the
Invalid Value Handling window. Omitted segments are excluded from numeric compositing so that
composite values will not be diluted. See Handling Special Values in Drillhole Data for more information.
These parameters can be applied to entire drillholes or only within a selected region of the drillhole. For
example, you may wish to composite Au values only within a specific lithology.
In Leapfrog Geo, you can composite numeric data in two ways:
l
Composite the drillhole data directly. This creates a new interval table that can be used to build models,
and changes made to the table will be reflected in all models based on that table. This process is
described below.
Composite the points used to create an interpolant. This is carried out by generating a contact surface
and then setting compositing parameters for the interpolants values object. The compositing settings are
only applied to the interpolant. See Setting Compositing Parameters for an Interpolant.
Drillhole data is composited from the Composites folder, which is in the project tree as part of the Drillholes
object. To create a numeric composite, right-click on the Composites folder and select New Numeric
Composite. The New Composited Table window will appear:
First, set the Compositing Length and the Minimum Coverage.

By default, compositing will be applied to all values down the length of drillhole. If you wish to composite only
within selected regions, click on the Region tab. Select the lithology or category column to use, then move the
categories you wish to composite into the Selected list:
Grouping Lithologies | 107
Finally, click on the Output Columns tab to select from the available columns of numeric data:
Click OK to create the table. Once you have created a composited table, you can edit it by right-clicking on it
and selecting Edit Composited Table.
Grouping Lithologies
The group lithologies tool lets you define a new unit to which existing units are added. For example, a
sandstone deposit might appear in an interval table as poorly-sorted and well-sorted units. With the group
lithologies tool, you can group both units into a single sandstone unit.
When you group lithologies, the original lithology column is preserved and a new lithology column is added to
the interval table. You can then select the original lithology column or the new one when displaying data and
creating models.
To start grouping two or more lithologies, right-click on the interval table in the project tree and select New
Column > Group Lithologies. The New Lithology Column window will appear:
Select the lithology column you wish to use from the Base Column list, then enter a Name for the new
lithology column. Click OK.
A window will appear displaying all lithologies in the base lithology column:
In this example, two spellings of Alluvium have been used and these lithologies should be combined into a
single lithology.
The most straightforward way to group lithologies is to select the first of the lithologies, then click New Group.
A group will be created for the selected lithology with only that lithology as a member:
Grouping Lithologies | 109
Next, click on a lithology in the Ungrouped Lithologies pane and drag it into the group:
Grouping lithologies creates a new lithology column and any lithologies left in the Ungrouped Lithologies
pane will be excluded from the new column. For this reason, once you have grouped the required lithologies,
move all remaining lithologies to the Groups pane by clicking on each lithology, then on the New Group
button. This will make each remaining lithology a new group with a single member:
When you are finished, click OK to create the new lithology column. It will appear in the project tree as an
additional lithology column in the interval table.
Select the new column from the shape list to display it:
Click on the Edit button ( ) to start editing the selected column.

The other way to group lithologies is to let Leapfrog Geo create the lithology groups. See Automatically
Creating Lithology Groups.
Automatically Creating Lithology Groups

Leapfrog Geo can automatically create lithology groups. To do this, create a new lithology column as described
in Grouping Lithologies. Click the Auto Group button to reveal more options:
The First letter(s) and Last letter(s) options let you create groups according the names of the existing
lithologies. Click Group to create the new groups.
Here, the first two letters have been used to created a new set of lithologies:
The two alluvium lithologies have been added to a single group.

The One group per value option creates a group for each original lithology. You can then drag and drop
lithologies into different groups, move lithologies you do not wish to group back into the Ungrouped
Lithologies pane and use the Delete Groups options to remove any empty groups.
Splitting Lithologies | 111
Splitting Lithologies
With the split lithologies tool, you can create new units from a single unit by selecting from intervals displayed
in the scene. When you split lithologies, the original lithology column is preserved and a new lithology column is
added to the interval table. You can then select the original lithology column or the new one when displaying
data and creating models.
The difference between the interval selection tool and the split lithologies tool is that with splitting
lithologies, you are limited to selecting intervals from a single lithology. If you wish to select intervals from
multiple lithologies, see Selecting Intervals.
To start splitting a lithology, first add the drillhole data to the scene. Then right-click on the interval table in the
project tree and select New Column > Split Lithologies. The New Lithology Column window will appear:
The Lithologies and Splits window will appear, together with a set of tools that will help you to select intervals
in the scene:
Alluvium (gold) appears both above and below Coarse Sand (blue) and so should be split into two separate
lithologies.
The first step is to select the lithology that will be split in the Lithologies and Splits window. In the example
above, Alluvium is already selected.
Next, click on the Select Intervals button ( ) and click the Add Intervals button ( ). In the scene, draw a line
across each interval you wish to select.
To change the width of the line used to select intervals, click on the Change Line Width button ( ) and
enter a new value. You can keep the Set Line Width window open while you select intervals so you can
change the line width as required.
Selected intervals are highlighted in the scene. If you accidentally select the wrong interval, click the Remove
Intervals button ( ) and draw across the interval once again. You can also:
l
Select all visible intervals by clicking on the Select All button ( ).
Clear all selected intervals by clicking on the Clear Selection button ( ).
Swap the selected intervals for the unselected intervals by clicking on the Invert Selection button ( ).
Splitting Lithologies | 113
Once you have selected some segments, click on the Assign to button in the Lithologies and Splits window
and select Create New Split:
The New Split window will appear:
Enter a Name for the new lithology, then click OK. The new lithology will be created and the scene updated to
reflect the changes:
Once you have created a new lithology, you can add to it by selecting intervals, then selecting the lithology
from the Assign to list.
When you are finished, click the Save button ( ) and close the Lithologies and Splits window. The new
lithology column will appear in the project tree as an additional lithology column in the interval table.
Click on the Edit button ( ) to start editing the selected column.
Selecting Intervals
When you wish to select a small portion of intervals or you dont have suitable parameters to use a query filter,
you can select intervals from drillholes displayed in the scene to create a new lithology column. The original
lithology column is preserved and a new lithology column is added to the interval table. You can then select the
original lithology column or the new one when displaying data and creating models.
The difference between the interval selection tool and the split lithologies tool is that with splitting
lithologies, you are limited to selecting intervals from a single lithology. With interval selection, you can
choose intervals from any lithology displayed in the scene.
Selecting Intervals | 115
To start selecting intervals, first add the drillhole data to the scene. Then right-click on the interval table in the
project tree and select New Column > Interval Selection. For a merged table, right-click on it and select
Interval Selection.
The New Lithology Column window will appear:
The Interval Selection window will appear, together with a set of tools that will help you to select intervals in
the scene. To select intervals, click on the Select Intervals button ( ) and click the Add Intervals button ( ).
In the scene, draw a line across each interval you wish to select:
Selected intervals are highlighted in the scene. If you accidentally select the wrong interval, click the Remove
Intervals button ( ) and draw across the interval once again. You can also:
l
Select all visible intervals by clicking on the Select All button ( ).
Clear all selected intervals by clicking on the Clear Selection button ( ).
Swap the selected intervals for the unselected intervals by clicking on the Invert Selection button ( ).
To change the width of the line used to select intervals, click on the Change Line Width button ( ) and
enter a new value. You can keep the Set Line Width window open while you select intervals so you can
change the line width as required.
When you have selected at least one interval, click on the Assign to button, then select Create New
Lithology:
Enter a Name for the new lithology, then click OK:
Creating an Overlaid Lithology Column | 117
The new lithology will be created and the scene updated to reflect the changes:
Once you have created a new lithology, you can add to it by selecting intervals, then selecting the lithology
from the Assign to list.
When you are finished, click the Save button ( ) and close the Interval Selection window. The new lithology
column will appear in the project tree as an additional lithology column in the interval table:
Creating an Overlaid Lithology Column

You may have two versions of an interval column, one that contains draft data and one that contains the final
version. The final version may contain gaps, which can be filled in using the draft version. The overlaid lithology
tool lets you combine the two columns to create a new column.
Both columns must be part of the same interval table. If they are not, use the merged table tool to create a new
table that contains both columns. See Creating a New Merged Drillhole Data Table.
To create an overlaid lithology column, right-click on the interval table in the project tree and select New
Column > Overlaid Lithology Column. For a merged table, right-click on it and select Overlaid Lithology
Column.
The New Overlaid Lithology Column window will appear:
For the Primary column, select the column that you wish to have precedence. Data in the Fallback column
will be used when no data is available from the Primary column.
Click Create to create the new column. The new column will appear in the project tree.
You can display drillhole data with the new column by selecting it from the shape list:
Creating a New Category Column from Numeric Data

When you have numeric data you wish to use with the lithology and category modelling tools, you can convert
the numeric data to a category column. To do this, right-click on the numeric data column and select New
Column > Category From Numeric. In the window that appears, select the Base Column, then enter a name
for the new column. Click OK.
The next step is to sort the numeric data into categories:
Leapfrog Geo automatically assigns three categories calculated from the distribution of data. To add a new
category, click the Add button and enter the required value. Click the Show Histogram button to view the
distribution of data in deciding what categories to define.
Click OK to create the new column, which will appear in the project tree as part of the original interval table.
Back-flagging Drillhole Data | 119
Back-flagging Drillhole Data

Evaluating geological models on drillholes creates a new lithology table containing the lithologies from the
selected model. The new table contains From, To and Lithology columns defined using the intersection
between the models output volumes and the drillholes.
To evaluate drillhole data in this way, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select New
Evaluation. The New Evaluation window will appear:
Select the model to use and enter names for the column and table. Click OK to create the new table, which will
appear in the project tree as part of the Drillholes object.
Viewing Correlation Statistics

When the geological model was created from the base lithology column, you can view the correlation between
modelled geology and actual logged drillhole segments. To do this, right-click on the table and select Statistics.
In the Correlation Statistics window, you can compare model values to drilled lithologies or vice versa:
To export the information displayed in the summary as a CSV file, click Export.
Creating a New Merged Drillhole Data Table

When you have more than one drillhole interval table in a project, you can create a new table using selected
columns from existing interval tables. You can include columns created by, for example, grouping or splitting
lithologies or compositing.
To create a merged table, right-click on the Drillholes object in the project tree and select New Merged Table.
The New Merged Table window will appear showing all interval columns available in the project:
You can change the columns included once you have created the table.
Select the columns you wish to include in the new table and click OK. The new table will appear in the project
tree as part of the Drillholes object.
You can create query filters for a merged data table, as described in Building Query Filters. You can also select
intervals (see Selecting Intervals) and create an overlaid lithology column (see Creating an Overlaid Lithology
Column). You cannot, however, use the group lithologies and split lithology tools on a merged table.
To edit the table, right-click on it and select Edit Merged Table.
Adding Core Photo Links

Leapfrog Geo can link drillhole data to ALS Webtrieve and Coreshed core photo databases. When drillhole data
has been linked, a photo link object will appear in the project tree:
You can only have one type of core photo link associated with the drillhole data. To add a link, right-click on the
Drillholes object and select Add Core Photo Link. In the window that appears, select the core photo provider
and click OK:
Setting Up the ALS Interface | 121
For information on setting up the links, see:

l
To use the core photo links, see:

l

Before you can view core photos, you must first log in to the ALS database. Two levels of security are
provided, one set up in Leapfrog Geo and the next via your browser.
To set up the interface between Leapfrog Geo and the ALS database, right-click on the Drillhole Data object
and select Add Core Photo Link. In the window that appears, select ALS Webtrieve and click OK. The ALS
Core Photo Settings window will appear:
Information required to access core data is the Project Name and the Encryption Key. This information
provides the first level of security for information in the ALS database. Click on each field and enter the required
information. The information is case-sensitive, so ensure that the characters entered are correctly capitalised.
For Leapfrog depths measured in, ensure that the units used for depth match in Leapfrog Geo and ALS.
For Open selection in new browser, choose whether each core photo will be opened in a separate browser
Window or Tab.
Click OK to save the information. If login is successful, the ALS Core Photos button ( ) will appear in the
toolbar:
A link will also appear in the project tree as part of the Drillholes object:
Before you can view core photos, you must login via the browser. To do this, add drillhole data to the scene, if it
is not already visible. Click on a drillhole in the scene, then click on the ALS Core Photo Link button in the
window that appears:
Your browser will be launched and you will be prompted to log in to the ALS database. Enter the User Name
and Password, which are case-sensitive. Remember to allow the browser to save the details so that you will
not be prompted to log in each time you wish to view a photo.
Your browser settings may require that you install a plugin or make changes to settings in order to view core
photos. If you are not able to access the ALS database from Leapfrog Geo and have ensured your Project
Name, Encryption Key, User Name and Password have been entered correctly, contact Customer
Using the ALS Interface | 123
Support as described in Getting Support.

Once you have logged in via your browser, you will be able to view core photos from the scene, as described in
Using the ALS Interface.

Before you can view core photos, you must first log in to the ALS database. See Setting Up the ALS Interface.
Once the interface between Leapfrog Geo and the ALS database is set up, you can view core photos by
clicking on a drillhole in the scene, then clicking on the ALS Core Photo Link button in the window that
appears.
If you want to view core photos in rapid succession, click on the ALS Core Photos button ( ) in the toolbar,
then click on a drillhole in the scene. This will simultaneously display information on the segment selected in
Leapfrog Geo and the core photo in your browser.

Before you can view core photos, you must first set up the Coreshed interface. To do this, right-click on the
Drillhole Data object and select Add Core Photo Link. In the window that appears, select Coreshed and
click OK. The Coreshed Photo Settings window will appear:
Select the View and Layout. For Open in new browser, choose whether each core photo will be opened in a
separate browser Window or Tab.
Click OK to save the information. The Coreshed Core Photos button ( ) will appear in the toolbar:
A link will also appear in the project tree as part of the Drillholes object:
Before you can view core photos, you must login via the browser. To do this, add drillhole data to the scene, if it
is not already visible. Click on a drillhole in the scene, then click on the Coreshed Photo Link button in the
window that appears:
Your browser will be launched and you will be prompted to log in to the Coreshed database. Entere the
Username and Password, which are case-sensitive. Remember to allow the browser to save the details so
that you will not be prompted to log in each time you wish to view a photo.
Your browser settings may require that you install a plugin or make changes to settings in order to view core
photos. If you are not able to access the Coreshed database from Leapfrog Geo and have ensured your
Username and Password have been entered correctly, contact Customer Support as described in Getting
Support.
Once you have logged in via your browser, you will be able to view core photos from the scene, as described in
Using the Coreshed Interface.

Before you can view core photos, you must first log in to the Coreshed database. See Setting Up the Coreshed
Interface.
Once the interface between Leapfrog Geo and the Coreshed database is set up, you can view core photos by
clicking on a drillhole in the scene, then clicking on the Coreshed Photo Link button in the window that
appears.
Deleting Drillhole Data | 125
If you want to view core photos in rapid succession, click on the Coreshed Photo Link button ( ) in the
toolbar, then click on a drillhole in the scene. This will simultaneously display information on the segment
selected in Leapfrog Geo and the core photo in your browser.
Deleting Drillhole Data

To delete a lithology or numeric data table, right-click on the table in the project tree and select Delete. You will
be asked to confirm your choice.
When you right-click on the drillhole or collar table object in the project tree and select Delete, the resulting
action will also remove all lithology and numeric data tables from the project. You will be asked to confirm your
choice.
Reloading Drillhole Data

Reloading data is necessary when the imported data is modified externally. All drillhole data can be reloaded by
right-clicking on the Drillholes object and selecting Reload Drillholes. If you only need to reload a single table,
right-click on that table and select Reload Data.
Reloading drillhole data overwrites all existing drillhole data. If you have data you wish to add to the project
without overwriting existing data, use the Append Drillholes option.
The process is similar to that for importing drillhole data:
l
If the drillhole data was loaded from a file on your computer or a network location, you will be prompted to
specify the file locations.
If the interval table is stored in an ODBC database, you will be prompted to connect to the database. See
Selecting the ODBC Data Source.
If your drillhole data is stored in an acQuire database, you will be prompted to connect to the database.
When you reload data, Leapfrog Geo retains the table structure and refreshes the data contained in the tables.
This ensures that you do not need to reassign the data type for each column and select the columns to be
imported.
Exporting Drillhole Data

Changes made to the drillhole data in Leapfrog Geo only affect the Leapfrog Geo database, not the original data
files. You can export Leapfrog Geo drillhole data, which is useful if you wish to keep a copy of drillhole data
outside the project.
You can:
l
Export all data. See Exporting All Drillhole Data.
Export only a single data table. See Exporting a Single Drillhole Data Table.
Exporting All Drillhole Data

To export all drillhole data, right-click on the Drillholes object and select Export. The Export Drillhole Data
window will appear:
Once you have selected how you wish to export the data, click OK. The Export Drillhole Data Files window
will appear:
The list shows the files that will be created, one for each data table. Choose the Folder where the files will be
saved, then enter a Base file name, which will be added to the front of each file name.
Click Export to save the files.
Exporting a Single Drillhole Data Table

To export a single drillhole data table, right-click on that table and select Export. The Export Drillhole Data
window will appear:
Once you have selected how you wish to export the data, click OK. You will be prompted for a filename and
location.
Importing and Working with Other Data Types

You can import many different types of data into Leapfrog Geo. This topic describes importing and creating
points data, structural data, meshes and polylines.
Importing and Working with GISData, Maps and Images

Often the first data imported into a new project is information that sets the coordinates for the project as a
whole. This includes GIS data, maps, aerial photos and 2D grids. Leapfrog Geo also has tools for creating
GISlines.
All GISdata in the project can be viewed draped on the topography. See Viewing GIS Data for more
information.
You can view the attribute table for most GISdata objects by right-clicking and selecting Attribute Table. You
can also create query filters that can be used when displaying the GIS object. See Using the Table Dialog and
Building Query Filters for more information.
Importing Vector Data

Vector data formats Leapfrog Geo supports include:
l
ESRI Shape files (*.shp)
MapInfo files (*.tab, *.mif)
ESRI Personal GeoDatabase files (*.mdb)
You can also import data from MapInfo and ESRI databases. See Importing a MapInfo Batch File and
Importing Data From an ESRIGeodatabase for more information
To import vector data, right-click on the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder and select Import Vector Data.
Navigate to the folder that contains GIS data file and select the file. You can select multiple files using the Shift
and Ctrl keys.
Click Open to begin importing the data.
If you are importing a single file, the Import GIS Vector Data window will show a summary of the data in the
selected file:
You can choose what field in the data to use for the Elevation Field from the dropdown list.
Importing Maps and Images | 129
If you are importing multiple files, all files being imported are listed in the Import GISVector Data window and
no summary of each file is displayed:
Data is automatically clipped to the clipping boundary, but you can change how the data is filtered to suit any
bounding box that exists in the project. If you do not wish to clip the data, untick the Filter Data box.
Click OK to add the data to the project. The object or objects will appear in the project tree under the GIS Data,
Maps and Photos folder. You can then view an objects attributes by right-clicking on it and selecting
Attribute Table.
When importing files, you may be prompted to select whether or not to filter elevation data. If you wish to
use another data source for your elevation data, select Filter Data. For example, if you import a GIS line
that has suspect elevation data, you can discard the elevation data and set the elevation from the
topography, as described in Setting Elevation for a GISObject.
Importing Maps and Images

Image formats Leapfrog Geo supports include:
l
PNG files (*.png)
JPEG files (*.jpg, *.jpeg)
TIFF and GeoTIFF files (*.tiff, *.tif)
Windows Bitmap files (*.bmp)
Images larger than 16384 by 16384 pixels will be scaled down. Reducing your images in size below this
limit will avoid scaling; you can do this by cropping the image during the import process or by scaling down
the image in an external image editor.
If the file contains georeference information, it too will be imported.
To import a map or image, right-click on the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder and select Import Map.
Navigate to the folder that contains the GIS data file and select the file. The Import Image window will be
displayed:
The three reference markers ( , , ) are used to set coordinates for the image in the scene. If the image is
the first object added to the project, this will, in effect, set the coordinate system for the project.
The scene markers ( ,
) let you copy georeference information from the scene.
Cropping the image to only the area of interest will reduce video RAM usage and may improve graphics
performance. To crop the image, click on the Crop Image button ( ), then drag around the part of the image
you wish to use. Click on the Remove Crop button ( ) to clear the cropping.
Georeferencing in Leapfrog Geo

Leapfrog Geo imports georeference information as X, Y, Z coordinates. It is not necessary to specify what
georeferencing standard is being used.
If the data you are importing uses, for example, latitude and longitude for X and Y, but feet for elevation, you
can scale the Z axis to a value that provides a better picture of the information being displayed. See Scaling the
Z Axis for more information.
If you are importing data that uses different coordinate systems, you will need to pre-process the data so that it
is using the same coordinate system.
Adding georeference data to a map will set the location of the map in the three-dimensional viewer. It is often
used as a first step in setting the coordinates for the project as a whole.
Manual Georeferencing
If the image does not contain georeference information, you will need to add it manually by adding the three
reference markers ( , , ) to the image. To select a marker, click on it, then move it to the required location
Manual Georeferencing | 131
on the image using the mouse or the arrow keys.

Once each marker is correctly positioned, enter the real-world X and Y coordinates for each marker:
There are two ways to do this:

l
Enter the coordinates for each marker in the East (X) and North (Y) fields. As you enter the coordinates,
the positions of the markers will be displayed in the scene.
Copy coordinates from the scene using the three scene markers ( ,
).
The second method is useful when you already have other objects correctly georeferenced in the project. For
example, if you have a larger map in the project and wish to import a more detailed map, you can copy the
coordinates from the georeferenced map to the detailed one. To do this, move the Import Image window so
you can see enough of the scene to work in both windows:
1. In the Import Image window, position the marker ( ,
) on the image being imported.
2. Click the corresponding copy coordinates marker ( ,
).
3. Zoom in to the point in the scene where you wish to place the marker and click.
Manual Georeferencing | 133
The coordinates in the scene will be copied to the Import Image window:
Once you have set the coordinates for each marker, click OK to return to the main window. Once Leapfrog Geo
saves the image, it will appear in the project tree under the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder.
Automatic Georeferencing
If the image contains georeference data, it will automatically be displayed:
If the georeference data in the imported image uses a different coordinate system than that used for the project,
you can change the georeference data by ticking the Override images georeference data box, then editing
the information.
Click OK to import the image. It will appear in the project tree under the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder.
Exporting a Georeferenced Image

Leapfrog Geo exports georeferenced images as GeoTIFFs. To do this, right-click on it in the project tree and
select Export. You will be prompted for a filename and location. Click Save.
Importing 2D Grids | 135
Importing 2D Grids
ERMapper files (*.ers) can be imported into Leapfrog Geo as 2D grids. To import a 2D grid, right-click on the
GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder and select Import 2D Grid. Navigate to the folder that contains grid and
select the file. Click Open to begin importing the data.
The Import 2D Grid window will appear, displaying the grid and each of the bands available:
Select the data type for each band and set the georeference information, if necessary. See Importing Maps and
Images for information on georeferencing imported files.
When you display the grid in the scene, select the imported bands from the shape list:
Grids can be displayed as points ( ) or as cells and the values filtered, as described in Displaying Points Data.
Importing a MapInfo Batch File

You can import a collection of GISdata exported from MapInfo. The MapInfo file can include points, lines,
polygons, images and elevation grids.
To import GIS data in this way, right-click on the GISData, Maps and Photos folder and select Batch Import
> from MapInfo. In the window that appears, navigate to the folder that contains the MapInfo batch file, which
is an XML file. Click Open.
The data that can be imported will be displayed and you can select which files to import:
Importing Data From an ESRIGeodatabase | 137
Click OK to import the selected files. Points, lines, polygons and images will be added to the GISData, Maps
and Photos folder. Elevation grids will be added to the Meshes folder.
Importing Data From an ESRIGeodatabase

You can import points, lines and polygons from an ESRI geodatabase. However, the importation of raster data
is not supported.
To import GIS points, lines and polylines in this way, right-click on the GISData, Maps and Photos folder and
select Batch Import > from ESRI Geodatabase. In the window that appears, navigate to the folder that
contains the database and click Open.
Leapfrog Geo imports uncompressed ESRI geodatabases.
The data that can be imported will be displayed and you can select which files to import:
Click OK to import the selected files. Points, lines, polygons and images will be added to the GISData, Maps
and Photos folder. Elevation grids will be added to the Meshes folder.
Setting Elevation for a GISObject

You can set the elevation for GIS objects by:
l
Using a fixed elevation
Using the elevation data from one of the objects attributes
You can also set the elevation for GIS lines or points objects by projecting the object onto any surface in the
project.
To set the elevation for a GIS object, right-click on it in the project tree and select Set Elevation. The Set
Elevation window will appear:
The From surface option is only available for lines and points objects.
Select the option required and click OK.
Creating a New GIS Lines Object

There are two ways to create a new GIS lines object in Leapfrog Geo:
l
If you do not have GIS data for a topographical feature you wish to use in model building, you can draw a
new GIS lines object.
If you have a polyline you wish to use as a GISlines object, right-click on it in the project tree and select
Extract GIS Line. The new GIS lines object ( ) will appear in the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder. It
is not linked to the original polyline.
To view the new lines object draped on the topography, select the object from the GIS data dropdown list, as
described in Displaying Topography in the Scene Window.
You can edit the GIS line at any time by right-clicking on it in the project tree and selecting Edit. If it is in the
shape list, you can edit it by clicking on the Edit button ( ).
Drawing a New GIS Lines Object

To draw a new GIS lines object, add the topography to the scene to serve as a reference while drawing.
If the topography has not been defined, you will not be able to create a new GIS lines object.
Next, right-click on the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder and select New GIS Lines Object. In the window
that appears, enter a name for the new object and click OK.
The object will be created in the project tree and added to the shape list. The scene view will change to view the
objects in the scene from above and tools for drawing straight polylines will appear. Click on the Draw lines
button ( ) and start drawing in the scene, as described in Drawing With the Straight Line Tool. When you have
finished drawing, click the Save button ( ). The new line ( ) will be saved in the project tree.
Exporting GIS Data | 139
Exporting GIS Data

To export GIS data, right-click on the GISdata object in the GIS Data, Maps and Photos folder and select
Export. The Export GIS window will be displayed:
Select whether elevation information will come from the topography or from the GISobject itself, or untick the
Use 2.5D format with elevations from box to export the object without elevation information.
Click Export. You be prompted for a filename and location.
Importing and Working with Points Data

Points are sets of 3D coordinates, with or without associated values. In Leapfrog Geo, points are used to
define surfaces and for interpolation.
The Points folder can be used to import points data, extract contact points and intrusion values from drillhole
data and import distribution data and geophysical data. You can also create a grid of points that can be
evaluated against geological models and interpolants and exported for use in other modelling packages.
Importing Points Data

To import points data, right-click on the Points folder and select Import Points. You will be prompted to select
a file. Leapfrog Geo supports the following file types for points data:
l
CSV files (*.csv)
ASCII text files (*.asc)
Leapfrog Geo 3D Point Data files (*.pl3, *.ara)
The file will be imported and added to the Points folder. If there are errors in the data, the errors can be
corrected as described in Correcting Drillhole Data Errors.
To view the imported data, double-click on the object that has been added to the Points folder.
Once points data has been imported to the project, it can be modified and evaluated against an interpolant.
Appending Points Data

If points data is stored in multiple files, you can import these files into the project and add them to existing
points data. To do this, right-click on the object you wish to append and select Append Data. You will be
prompted to select a file.
Next, the Import Tables For Appending window will be displayed.
Check the data to ensure that the correct information will be imported, then click Finish to add the new file.
Extracting Points from Drillhole Data

In Leapfrog Geo, you can extract different types of points from imported drillhole data. See:
l
Extracting Contact Points from Drillhole Data | 141

Contact points define the boundary between two lithology layers. You can extract contact points from interval
tables to create a new points object in the Points folder. The values extracted are the x-y-z values of the
contact points.
To extract contact points from an interval table, right-click on the Points folder and select New Contact
Points. A window will appear listing the lithology and category columns available in the project:
Select the required column and click OK.

Next, the New Contact Points window will appear:
Select the lithology required from the Select primary lithology list, then select the adjacent lithologies you
wish to extract in the Contacting lithologies list.
For complex geologies, the up and down directions for the surface may not be clear. If this is the case, untick
the Horizontal Plane box. A reference plane will appear in the scene, with the up-facing surface labelled A and
the downward-facing surface labelled B:
Controlling the position of the reference plane is similar to controlling the position of the moving plane:
l
Use the handles in the scene window to move the plane.

Set the Dip and Dip Azimuth values in the New Contact Points window. The reference plane will be
Once the reference plane is correctly oriented, click the Set From Plane button.
A reference plane set for contact points in the Points folder will be applied wherever the contact points are
used.
Click OK to create the points, which will appear in the project tree under the Points folder. To edit the points,
double-click on them.

You can extract intrusion points from interval tables to create a new points object in the Points folder.
To extract intrusion values from an interval table, right-click on the Points folder and select New Intrusion
Values. A window will appear listing the lithology and category columns available in the project:
Select the required column and click OK.
Changing Intrusion Point Generation Parameters | 143
Next, the New Intrusion window will appear:
Select the intrusion lithology, then select the options required. See Creating Intrusional Contact Surfaces for
more information on the options in this window.
Click OK to create the new points object, which will appear in the project tree under the Points folder. To edit
the points, double-click on the points object ( ) in the project tree. See Changing Intrusion Point Generation
Parameters.
When you view the intrusion points in the scene, you can display only the contact points or all the points used
determining the extrusion values. To display all points, click on the points object in the shape list and tick the
box for Show volume points:

To change the way intrusion values are generated, double-click on the points object (
The Edit Intrusion window will appear, displaying the Point Generation tab.
) in the project tree:
Here, the surface and volume points are displayed to show the effects of the Surface offset distance and
Background fill spacing parameters:
The Surface offset distance parameter sets the top and bottom ends of the interval and affects how a surface
behaves when it approaches a contact point. A smaller distance restricts the angles that an approaching
surface can take. Another factor that affects the angles a surface will take is whether or not a trend has been
applied to the surface.
The Background Fill Spacing parameter determines the approximate length of segments in the remaining
intervals. If the remaining interval is not a multiple of the Background Fill Spacing value, Leapfrog Geo will
automatically adjust the spacing to an appropriate value. A smaller value for Background Fill Spacing means
higher resolution and, therefore, slightly smoother surfaces. However, computation can take longer.

You can extract interval midpoints from raw or composited numeric and category tables to create a new points
object in the Points folder. The extracted points will be dynamically linked to the original drillhole segments and
can be evaluated against other data in the project. The values extracted are the midpoints of each segment, the
x-y-z values and the hole ID.
To extract midpoints from an interval table, right-click on the Points folder and select New Interval Mid
Points. In the window that appears, select the required Source table, then select which data columns to use:
Apply a query filter, if required, then click OK. The new points object will appear in the project tree under the
Points folder. To edit the points, double-click on the points object ( ) in the project tree.
Importing Geophysical Data | 145
Changes made to the source data table, such as changes to compositing parameters or special values rules,
will be reflected in the extracted points object.
Extracted interval midpoints can be exported in CSV (*.csv) or Isatis 3D point file (*.asc) formats.
Importing Geophysical Data

To import geophysical data, right-click on the Points folder and select Import Geophysical Data. You will be
prompted to select a *.dfn file. Click Open to continue.
You will then be prompted to name the table:
Enter a name and click OK. The file will be imported and added to the Points folder.
To view the imported data, double-click on the object that has been added to the Points folder.
Creating a Grid of Points

You can create a grid of points that can be evaluated against geological models and interpolants and exported
for use in other modelling packages.
To create a grid of points, right-click on the Points folder and select New Grid of Points. The New Grid of
Points window will appear, together with controls in the scene that will help in setting the grids boundary:
If there are objects displayed in the scene, the initial grid dimensions will be based on those objects.
The controls in the scene adjust the size and position of the grid as follows:
l
Red and pink handles adjust the Boundary Size.
The orange handle adjusts the Base Point.
The blue handles adjust the Azimuth.
Set the Spacing and Reference Point, which will control the number of points in the grid. You can set the
Reference Point by clicking in the scene. To do this, first click on the Select button ( ) for the Reference
Point, then click in the scene. The coordinates in the scene will be copied to the New Grid of Points window.
If the number of points will be very large, rendering of the grid in the scene will be disabled.
You will be able to change the settings in this window once the grid has been created.
Click OK to create the grid, which will appear in the Points folder. Double-click on the grid to change its
settings.
Once you have created the grid, you will be able to evaluate it against geological models, interpolants and
distance functions in the project. See Evaluating Points Data.
Evaluations will be exported with the grid. See Exporting a Grid of Points for more information.
Exporting a Grid of Points

You can export a grid of points in the following formats:
l
CSV file (*.csv)
GSLIB Data file (*.dat)
Surpac Block Model file (*.mdl)
Isatis Block Model file (*.asc)
Geo 3D Point Data file (*.pl3, *.ara)
For CSV, Surpac Block Model and Isatis format files, all evaluations on the grid of points will be exported as
part of the file. For all other file types, only numeric evaluations will be exported.
To export a grid of points, right-click on it in the project tree and select Export. Select the format required, enter
a filename and location, then click Save.
Evaluating Points Data

Once points data has been imported to a project, it can be evaluated against geological models, interpolants
and distance functions created in the project, as described in Evaluating Objects.
In the case of geological models, you can also combine two or more models to evaluate the points data and set
the priority used for evaluation. To do this, click on the Combined Evaluation button in the Select Models To
Evaluate window. In the window that appears, select the evaluations to combined, then set their priority. Click
OK to create the combined evaluation, then click OK in the Select Models To Evaluate window. The
combined evaluation will be available from the colour dropdown list.
To delete a combined evaluation, click on the Delete Combined button in the Select Models To Evaluate
window.
Exporting Points Data | 147
Exporting Points Data

To export points data, right-click on the points data object ( ) in the project tree and select Export. The Export
Points window will appear:
Once you have selected how you wish to export the data, click OK. You will be prompted for a filename and
location.
Creating and Importing Structural Data

In Leapfrog Geo, you can create structural data tables directly or from other objects in the project. You can
also:
l
Edit structural data. See Editing Structural Data.
Display structural data in the scene. See Displaying Structural Data.
Use structural data in the project to modify other objects in the project. See Editing a Surface with
Structural Data in the topic Working with Surfaces in Leapfrog Geo.
Estimate structural data from other data in the project. See Estimating Structural Data.
Create lateral extents, faults and contact surfaces for geological models from structural data. See
Creating a Lateral Extent from Structural Data.
Import tables from other sources. See Importing Structural Data.
Downhole structural data can also be imported, although structural data tables imported in this way cannot be
edited. See Importing Downhole Structural Data.
Creating a New Structural Data Table

There are two ways to create a new structural data table in Leapfrog Geo:
l
Create a new table as part of creating or editing another object. See Creating a Lateral Extent from
Structural Data and Editing a Surface with Structural Data.
Create a new table using the Structural Data folder. Use this technique when, for example, you are
creating structural data points from a map or image. Right-click on the Structural Data folder and select
New Structural Data. In the window that appears, enter a name for the new table and click OK.
Before creating the new data table, add the map, image or data object you wish to work from to the scene and
orient the scene for drawing the new data points.
Creating a New Structural Data Table | 149
When a new structural data table is created, it will be added to the scene. The Structural Data window will
open, together with a set of tools for adding structural data points:
Click on the New Structural Data Point button ( ) and click and drag along the strike line in the scene to add
a new data point:
You can adjust the data point using the controls in the Structural Data window:
If you wish to assign points to categories, select New Category from the Base Category dropdown box. In
the window that appears, enter a name for the category, then click Create Category:
Importing Structural Data | 151
When adding additional data points, you can then select the new category from the Base Category list.
When you have finished adding data points, click the Save button ( ).
If the data contains categories that you wish to use in building models, define query filters for the categories.
You will then be able to select the filter when you are creating a surface:
See Building Query Filters for more information.
Importing Structural Data

Leapfrog Geo supports structural measurements in .csv or text formats. This topic describes importing
structural data tables that include location information. Downhole structural data can also be imported, as
described in Importing Downhole Structural Data.
To import a structural data table, right-click on the Structural Data folder and select Import Structural Data.
You will be prompted to select a file. Click Open to begin importing the data.
The process is similar to that for importing drillhole data. Leapfrog Geo will display the data and you can select
which columns to import:
Leapfrog Geo expects East (X), North (Y), Elev (Z), Dip and Dip Azimuth columns. The Base Category and
Polarity columns are optional. The Base Category column can be used for filtering data once it has been
imported.
Click Finish to import the data. The structural measurements will appear in the Structural Data folder.
If the data contains categories that you wish to use in building models, define query filters for the categories.
You will then be able to select the filter when you are creating a surface:
See Building Query Filters for more information.

Once the data has been imported, you can reload and append the data in a similar manner to drillhole data. See
Appending Drillholes and Reloading Drillhole Data for more information.
Editing Structural Data | 153
Editing Structural Data

Editing structural data tables is similar to editing drillhole data tables. To edit the data in the table directly,
double-click on the structural data table in the project tree. See Using the Table Dialog.
To edit the structural data in the scene, right-click on the table in the project tree and select Edit in Scene. If
the table is displayed in the scene, in the shape list, click on the Edit button ( ) in the shape list. The
Structural Data window will appear in the scene, together with controls for editing the data points. To edit a
data point, click on it. Information about the selected point will be displayed in the Structural Data window,
together with controls in the scene you can use to adjust the point:
You can also add new data points in the same manner described in Creating a New Structural Data Table.
Estimating Structural Data

You can generate a set of structural measurements using any points object in the project. To do this, right-click
on the points object and select Estimate Structural Data. In the window that appears, enter a name for the
structural data table, then click OK. The new structural data table will appear in the project tree and you can
view and edit it as described in Displaying Structural Data and Editing Structural Data.
Importing, Creating and Editing Meshes

The Meshes folder contains all meshes imported into Leapfrog Geo and created in Leapfrog Geo outside of the
model building process.
Two types of meshes are stored in the Meshes folder:
l
Non-editable meshes ( ) are meshes imported into Leapfrog Geo and meshes created in Leapfrog Geo
from the moving plane, Meshes > Mesh Operations tools and by extracting mesh parts from other
surfaces in the project.
Editable meshes ( ) are created in Leapfrog Geo from data objects such as points data, GIS data and
polylines. Editable meshes can be refined by adding more data. Editable meshes can be interpolated
meshes (using FastRBF) or triangulated meshes (using Delaunay triangulation). Interpolated meshes can
also be created from structural data and values objects.
This topic describes importing meshes, creating meshes and modifying editable meshes. See Adding Data to
Surfaces, Adjusting Surfaces and Editing a Surface with Polylines for information about different techniques for
refining other surfaces in the project.
Importing a Mesh
Mesh formats Leapfrog Geo supports include:
l
Leapfrog Geo files (*.msh, *.ara)
Datamine mesh files (*tr.asc, *tr.dm)
DXF files (*.dxf)
Gemcom files (*.tri)
Surpac files (*.dtm)
VULCAN files (*.00t)
GOCAD files (*.ts)
To import a mesh, right-click on the Meshes folder and select Import Mesh. Navigate to the folder that
contains the mesh file, select the file and click Open. The Cleanup Mesh window will be displayed (see
Cleaning Up a Mesh). The mesh will be added to the project tree under the Meshes folder.
When importing a Vulcan 8 mesh that contains a path to an associated texture, Leapfrog Geo will also import
the texture. If the path to the texture does not exist, you can import it once the mesh has been imported. Do this
by right-clicking on the mesh in the project tree and selecting Import Texture. Navigate to the folder containing
the texture file and click Open. The texture will be imported and stored in the project tree as part of the mesh.
Once a mesh has been imported to the project, you can evaluate it against any interpolant or distance function
in the project. See Evaluating Objects for more information.
Cleaning Up a Mesh | 155
Cleaning Up a Mesh
There are several options for cleaning up a mesh that can be applied to meshes imported into Leapfrog Geo and
to non-editable meshes created in Leapfrog Geo.
To clean up a mesh, double-click on the mesh in the Meshes folder or right-click on the mesh and select
Open. The Cleanup Mesh window will be displayed:
The Cleanup Mesh window will also be displayed when you import meshes.
The first four options are automatically applied to meshes created in or imported into Leapfrog Geo:
l
Consistently orient faces ensures that a mesh can be used for inside/outside testing.
Remove non-vertex points removes points that are not used by any triangles.
Remove degenerate faces removes triangles with duplicate vertices.
Orient concentric parts ensures that internal parts have the correct orientation.
Other options are:

l
Invert mesh orientation reverses the polarity of the mesh.
Remove vertical edges removes any vertical faces from the mesh boundary.
Move Mesh lets you offset the mesh by a vector. Tick the Move Mesh box and enter the required values.
The offset values can be changed by opening the Clean Mesh window once again.
Select the options required, then click OK.
Importing an Elevation Grid

Elevation grid formats Leapfrog Geo supports include:
l
Arc/Info ASCII Grid files (*.asc, *.txt)
Arc/Info Binary Grid files (*.adf)
Digital Elevation Model files (*.dem)
Surfer ASCII or Binary Grid files (*.grd)
SRTM files (*.hgt)
ESRI.hdr Labelled Image files (*.img, *.bil)
GeoTIFF Image files (*.tiff, *.tif)
There are two ways to import an elevation grid:

l
Import the grid to the Meshes folder. Right-click on the Meshes folder and select Import Elevation Grid.
Import the grid as part of creating a topography. Right-click on the Topographies folder and select New
Topography > Import Elevation Grid.
Navigate to the folder that contains the elevation grid file and open the file. The Import Elevation Grid window
will be displayed:
Leapfrog Geo automatically sets a Surface resolution based on the information in the file, but you can change
the value if you wish. A lower value will produce more detail, but calculations will take longer. See Surface
Resolution in Leapfrog Geo for more information.
When importing an elevation grid, note that the resolution cannot be changed once the file has been
imported.
bounding box that exists in the project. If you do not wish to clip the data, untick Clip data to bounding box.
The Margin value determines how far outside the selected Bounding box the elevation grid will extend.
The No Data Handling option determines whether NoData values are displayed as gaps or at a fixed elevation
setting.
Click Import. If you are creating a new topography, you will then be prompted to enter a name for it and click
OK.
The elevation grid will be added to the Meshes folder. If you imported the grid as part of creating a topography,
a hyperlink to the grid in the Meshes folder will appear as part of the defined topography.
Creating Meshes
Leapfrog Geo provides you with several tools for creating meshes:
l
Clipping a Volume
Clipping a Mesh
Creating a Mesh from the Moving Plane | 157
These tools produce non-editable meshes ( ).

You can also create editable meshes ( ) that are interpolated or triangulated:
l
An interpolated mesh uses FastRBF to fit and interpolate surface data. The FastRBF is useful for
creating meshes from sparse datasets or when data has large areas where there are no points.
Interpolated meshes can be created from points data, GISdata, polylines, structural data and values
objects.
A triangulated mesh uses Delaunay triangulation to create the mesh. Triangulated meshes can be created
from points data, GIS data and polylines. A triangulated mesh is suitable only for horizontal surfaces.
Editable meshes can be modified using other data in the project. See:
l

When a vertical wall, flat fault plane or other flat geological surface is required, the moving plane can be used to
create a simple mesh.
To create a new mesh from the moving plane, first display the plane in the scene by clicking on the Show
Plane button ( ). Use the controls in the scene to position the plane, then right-click on the Meshes folder and
select Mesh From Moving Plane. The Mesh From Plane window will appear:
Set the Resolution for the mesh, enter a name and click OK. The new mesh will appear in the Meshes folder.
See Surface Resolution in Leapfrog Geo for more information on the resolution setting.

To create a new mesh from two existing closed meshes, right-click on the Meshes folder and select Mesh
Operations > Boolean Volume. The Boolean Volume window will appear:
The Available list shows all closed meshes available in the project. Select a mesh by double-clicking on it or
by clicking on it, then on the arrow.
The Operation type can be Intersect or Union.
Click OKto save the new mesh, which will appear in the Meshes folder. To edit the mesh, double-click on it.
The Boolean Volume window will appear.
When any of the meshes used to create the volume is modified, the volume will be updated.
Clipping a Volume
To clip a closed mesh using another mesh, right-click on the Meshes folder and select Mesh Operations >
Clip Volume. The Clip Volume window will appear. Select the meshes you wish to use and whether to retain
the inside or outside of the clipped mesh.
When either of the meshes used to create the clipped volume is modified, the clipped volume will also be
updated.
Clipping a Mesh
This option creates a new mesh that consists of the parts of a Clip mesh that are inside, outside or overlap with
the Using mesh. To clip one mesh using another mesh or boundary in this manner, right-click on the Meshes
folder and select Mesh Operations > Clip Mesh. The Clip Mesh window will appear:
Extracting Mesh Parts from a Surface | 159
Select the meshes to use, then choose whether to retain the inside or the outside of the clipped mesh. Tick the
Include overlap box to include the overlap between the two meshes as part of the new mesh.
The Clip Mesh window will appear.
When either of the meshes used to create the clipped mesh is modified, the clipped mesh will be updated.

To extract the triangles from a mesh and create a new mesh, right-click on the surface and select Extract
Mesh Parts. The Extract Mesh Parts window will appear:
The Extract clipped mesh option is only available for meshes that are clipped to a boundary.
The largest part is initially selected. You can sort the mesh parts by Volume or by Area by clicking the heading
of the respective column.
To select all parts, click the Select All button. To de-select all parts click the Remove All button.
Inside-out parts have negative volume. To remove them, click the Remove Inside-Out button.
To remove parts smaller than a given size, first click the Select All button. Select the last item you want to
keep and click the Remove Below Current button.
Click OKto save the new mesh, which will appear in the Meshes folder. The mesh generated is a non-editable
mesh ( ).
Meshes created in this way are not connected to the mesh they were created from. Changes to the original
mesh will not be reflected in the selected parts.
If the quality of the mesh produced is not acceptable, clip the mesh as described in Clipping a Mesh.

An interpolated mesh is a type of editable mesh ( ). An interpolated mesh uses FastRBF to fit and interpolate
surface data. The FastRBF is useful for creating meshes from sparse datasets or when data has large areas
where there are no points. Interpolated meshes can be created from points data, GISdata, polylines, structural
data and values objects.
Interpolated meshes can be edited by adding more data to the mesh and changing settings as described in
Refining Interpolated Meshes.
The steps for creating a mesh from data in the project are similar, regardless of the data used to create the
mesh. The exception is creating an offset mesh, which requires additional parameters. See Creating and
Editing an Offset Mesh for more information.
To create an interpolated mesh from data in the project, right-click on the Meshes folder and select from the
New Mesh options.
Here, a new mesh is being created from points:
Select the required object from the list.

When defining the meshs extents, you can set the extents to be independent of other objects in the project
(Own extents) or you can use the extents of another object (Shared with). When you select the Shared with
option, the mesh will be updated when the extents object it shares is updated.
Leapfrog Geo automatically sets the surface resolution based on the data available in the project. You can
experiment with the surface resolution and adaptive settings once you have created the mesh. See Surface
Resolution in Leapfrog Geo for more information on the effects of these settings.
Enter a name for the new mesh and click OK.
If you are creating the mesh from a polyline, you will be prompted to select an existing polyline or draw a new
one. If you draw a new polyline, it will not be able to be used elsewhere in the project unless it has been shared.
To share the polyline, expand the mesh in the project tree, right-click on the polyline and select Share.
The new mesh will appear in the Meshes folder. Expand the mesh in the project tree to see how it was made.
As further refinements are made to the mesh, that information will also be added to the mesh in the project tree.
See Refining Interpolated Meshes for more information on adding data to the mesh and changing its settings.

Editable interpolated meshes ( ) can be refined by adding data, as described in Adding Data to Surfaces. The
options available depend on how the mesh was created.
To add data to an editable mesh, right-click on it and select one of the options from the Add menu. A list of
objects available in the project will be displayed. Select the required object and click OK. The mesh will be
updated and the object used to modify it will appear under it in the project tree.
Creating and Editing a Triangulated Mesh | 161
You can also refine editable interpolated meshes by changing the trend, transforming values, adjusting the
interpolant and changing the boundary. To do this, double-click on the mesh. The Edit Mesh window will be
opened:
See Creating and Editing an Offset Mesh for the options available for meshes from offset points.
In the General tab, you can change the Surface resolution. See Surface Resolution in Leapfrog Geo.
Tick the box for Snap mesh to surface points and set a Maximum snap distance, if you wish the mesh to
snap to points. If you will be exporting the mesh for use in another application, you may wish to adjust the snap
settings.
Data used to create the mesh will appear in the Input values list. When you add more data to the mesh, those
objects will also be listed. You can remove those additional objects by expanding the mesh in the project tree,
then right-clicking on the data object and selecting Remove.
In the Boundary tab, you can change whether the mesh boundary is independent of other objects in the project
Options available in other tabs are similar to those available for interpolants. See:
l
For information on the parameters in the Interpolants tab, see:

l

A triangulated mesh is a type of editable mesh ( ). A triangulated mesh uses Delaunay triangulation to create
the mesh and can handle more points than an interpolated mesh. Triangulated meshes can be created from
points data, GIS data and polylines. Large datasets representing horinzontal surfaces can be used to created a
triangulated mesh.
The steps for creating a mesh from data in the project are similar, regardless of the data used to create the
mesh. To create a triangulated mesh from data in the project, right-click on the Meshes folder and select from
the New Triangulated Mesh options.
Here, a new triangulated mesh is being created from points:
Select the required object from the list.

When defining the meshs extents, you can set the extents to be independent of other objects in the project
The Use error threshold setting lets you exclude data points that fall within the threshold. This can be useful if
you are using a large dataset and you require a more coarse surface that omits some data. When Use error
threshold is disabled, the mesh will follow all the data.
Here, a mesh created from points has the Use error threshold disabled. The mesh follows all the points:
Creating and Editing a Triangulated Mesh | 163
Here, a mesh has been created with the Distance set to 20. The mesh ignores points that fall outside the
threshold:
You will be able to change the Use error threshold setting once the mesh has been created.
Enter a name for the new mesh and click OK.
If you are creating the mesh from a polyline, you will be prompted to select an existing polyline or draw a new
one. If you draw a new polyline, it will not be able to be used elsewhere in the project unless it has been shared.
To share the polyline, expand the mesh in the project tree, right-click on the polyline and select Share.
The new mesh will appear in the Meshes folder and you can edit its settings by double-clicking on it.
To add data to a triangulated mesh, right-click on it and select one of the options from the Add menu. A list of
objects available in the project will be displayed. Select the required object and click OK. The mesh will be
updated and the object used to modify it will appear under it in the project tree.

You can create a new interpolated mesh by offsetting an existing mesh with any points object in the project. To
do this, first ensure the points and mesh you wish to use are already in the project. Next, right-click on the
Meshes folder and select New Mesh > From Offset Points. In the window that appears, select the Mesh and
Points to use:
When the mesh is created, it will automatically snap to the points, and points outside the Distance Limits will
be ignored. These settings can be changed once the mesh has been created.
An offset mesh may be distorted if points used to offset the mesh lie too far outside the mesh extents. If
this occurs, set a Maximum distance to exclude points far away from the mesh extents.
Enter a name for the new mesh and click OK. The new mesh will appear in the Meshes folder.
To edit the mesh, double-click on it. The Edit Offset Mesh window will appear:
The mesh is created with Snap mesh to surface points enabled. If you will be exporting the mesh for use in
another application, you may wish to adjust the snap settings.
You can also modify an offset mesh by adding data, as described in Refining Interpolated Meshes. You can
also edit the meshs boundary, but you cannot apply a trend, clip and transform values or adjust the interpolant
as you can for other interpolated editable meshes.
Draping an Image on a Mesh | 165
Draping an Image on a Mesh

You can drape images on any mesh in the Meshes folder. To do this, right-click on the mesh in the Meshes
folder and select one of the Drape Image options.
l
For the Import Image option, you will be prompted for a file location. Navigate to the folder containing the
image you wish to drape, select the file and click Open. Set georeferencing information for the image, if
required, then click OK. See Importing Maps and Images for more information on georeferencing images.
The imported image will appear in the project tree under the mesh.
For the Select Existing Image option, select from the images available in the project and click OK.
Ahyperlink to the image will appear in the project tree under the mesh.
You can drape as many images as required. When the mesh is displayed in the scene, you will be able to
select any draped images from the list of display options.
When you import and georeference an image, you can then export it as a GeoTIFF. To do this, right-click on
it in the project tree and select Export. You will be prompted for a filename and location. Click Save.
Exporting a Mesh
You can export a mesh created in Leapfrog Geo for use in other software. Formats Leapfrog Geo can export
are:
l
Leapfrog Geo Attribute Binary Mesh format (*.msh, *.ara)
GOCAD ASCII (*.ts)
Drawing Exchange (*.dxf)
Surpac ASCII (*.dtm, *.str)
Gemcom TRIASCII (*.tri)
Datamine ASCII (*tr.asc, *pt.asc)
Micromine ASCII (*MMpt.dat, *MMtr.dat)
VULCAN (*.00t)
DXF Polyface Mesh (MineCAD) (*.dxf)
Alias Wavefront Object (*.obj)
You can export meshes in several ways:

l
Export a single mesh. See Exporting a Single Mesh.
Export multiple meshes from the Meshes folder. See Exporting Multiple Meshes from the Meshes Folder.
Export multiple meshes from a geological model, interpolant, combined model or static model. This
options lets you export meshes from a single model or interpolant. See Exporting Multiple Meshes from
Models and Interpolants.
Exporting a Single Mesh

To export a mesh, right-click on the mesh and select Export. The Export Mesh Parts window will appear:
The Export clipped mesh option is only available for meshes that are clipped to a boundary. If the quality of
the mesh produced is not acceptable, clip the mesh as described in Clipping a Mesh, then export the mesh.
Select the Parts to Export, then click OK. You will be prompted for a filename and location.
Exporting Multiple Meshes from the Meshes Folder

To export multiple meshes from those in the Meshes folder, right-click on the Meshes folder and select Export
Meshes. In the window that appears, select the meshes you wish to export:
The filename that will be used for each mesh is shown in the Filenames column. To change the filename for
any of the meshes, click on its name in the Filenames column.
Next, select the format required and where to save the exported meshes. Click Export to save the meshes.
Exporting Multiple Meshes from Models and Interpolants | 167
Exporting Multiple Meshes from Models and Interpolants

You can export multiple meshes from individual geological models, interpolants, combined models and static
models. To export meshes in this way, right-click on a model or interpolant and select Export. In the window
that appears, select the volumes and surfaces you wish to export:
For geological models, if you wish to export surfaces other than the output volumes, untick the Only Output
Volumes option. For faulted geological models, you also can select from the faulted volumes by ticking the
Faulted Volumes box.
The filename that will be used for each mesh is shown in the Filenames column. To change the filename for
any of the meshes, click on its name in the Filenames column.
Next, select the format required and where to save the exported meshes. For any of the export options other
than Leapfrog Model Files format, you can save the meshes as a zip file.
The Leapfrog Model File format exports a single *.lfm file. If the file is imported into the Meshes folder, each
output volume will appear as a single mesh.
Click Export to save the meshes.

For any mesh in a project, you can export an elevation grid for use in other software. Formats Leapfrog Geo can
export are:
l
ARC/Info ASCII Grid (*.asc)
ESRI.hdr Labelled (*.bil)
ENVI Raster Image (*.img)
Surfer ASCII Grid (*.grd)
To export an elevation grid, right-click on the mesh and select Export Elevation Grid. The Export Grid
window will appear:
The Snap to Grid option changes the extents of the exported grid so that they coincide with the elevation grid
spacing.
Enter the information required, then click Export to enter a filename and choose a location and format for the
file.
Exporting a Thickness Grid

For any mesh in a project, you can export a grid made up of the area between two surfaces. Formats Leapfrog
Geo can export are:
l
ARC/Info ASCII Grid (*.asc)
ESRI.hdr Labelled (*.bil)
ENVI Raster Image (*.img)
Surfer ASCII Grid (*.grd)
To export a thickness grid, right-click on the mesh and select Export Thickness Grid. The Export Thickness
Grid window will appear:
Select the surfaces required from the dropdown lists.

Enter the information required, then click Export. You will be prompted for a filename and location.
Importing, Creating and Exporting Polylines | 169
Importing, Creating and Exporting Polylines

Leapfrog Geo imports many common polyline formats and also has tools for drawing and exporting polylines.
See Importing Polylines. Polylines imported into Leapfrog Geo are stored in the Polylines folder.
There are three ways to create polylines in Leapfrog Geo:
l
Create a new polyline using the Polylines folder. These polylines are stored in the Polylines folder.
Create a new polyline as part of working with another tool. For example, a polyline can be drawn to create
a lateral extent in a geological model. These polylines are stored in the tool used to create them and
cannot be used elsewhere in the project unless they have been shared. To share a polyline, right-click on
it and select Share. The polyline will be moved to the Polylines folder and can be used elsewhere in the
project.
Create a new polyline from a GIS line. To do this, right-click on the GIS lines object ( or ) in the GIS
Data, Maps and Photos folder and select Extract Polyline. The new polyline object will appear in the
Polylines folder. It is not linked to the original GIS lines object.
Polylines can be drawn using the curved line drawing tool or the straight line drawing tool. See Drawing in 3D
for more information on both tools.
Export a polyline by right-clicking on it and selecting Export. Leapfrog Geo exports polylines in the following
formats:
l
Drawing Interchange Polylines (*.dxf). This format is available for both straight and curved polylines.
CSV Text Files (*.csv). This format is available for curved polylines.
Importing Polylines
Polyline formats Leapfrog Geo supports include:
l
Datamine Polylines (*.asc)
Surpac String Polylines (*.str)
Gemcom Polylines (*.asc)
Micromine Polylines (*.asc, *.str)
MineSight Polylines (*.srg)
Gocad Polylines (*.pl, *.ts)
Drawing Interchange Polylines (*.dxf)
Leapfrog Geo 3D Polylines (*.csv, *.txt)
To import a polyline, right-click on the Polylines folder and select Import Polyline. In the Import Polyline
window, navigate to the location where the polyline file is saved and select it. Click Open.
If the polyline file is in Gocad or DXF format, the importing will start immediately. For all other formats, the
Polyline Import window will appear:
If the polyline file is in one of the standard formats listed above, the default settings can be used. Click Import
to finish the process.
If, however, you wish to specify polyline import parameters, two pieces of information are required:
l
The columns the polyline vertex coordinates are in
How the polyline sections are separated in the file
Select the vertex coordinate columns by clicking on the heading at the top of a column and selecting one of
East (X), North (Y) or Elev (Z) from the list.
The polyline will be imported and added to the project tree under the Polylines folder.
Building Query Filters

Query filters can be used to select or view a subset of rows in a table. When used on a collar table, this
amounts to selecting collars. When used on an interval table, measurement intervals are selected. Query filters
can be used to model using a subset of data and to filter information displayed in the scene window.
A query can be created for any type of table in a project, including GISdata, points data and structural data.
When a query filter has been defined for an object and the object is displayed in the scene, the query filter can
be applied by clicking on the object in the shape list and selecting the query filter in the shape properties panel:
Query filters defined for collar tables are available to all other drillhole data tables.
To create a query filter, right-click on the required table in the project tree and select New Query Filter. The
Query Filter window will appear:
Type the required criteria into the Query box, using the query syntax described below. Press Ctrl-Enter for a
new line in longer queries. Click the ... button for more advanced query building options, which are described in
Building a Query and Advanced Query Building.
Assign the filter a name and click OK to save it. It will appear in the project tree under the table to which it
applies. To apply a query filter to the scene, select the object in the shape list, then select the filter from the
Query filter dropdown list in the shape properties panel:
In this case, because the query filter was created for the collar table, it is also available for the lithology table.
Leapfrog Geo Query Syntax

The Leapfrog Geo query syntax is based on the WHERE clause of the Structured Query Language (SQL) with
some restrictions:
Unary operators are not allowed
SQL functions cannot be used
The SELECT statement should not be used (as in 'holeid in (SELECT holeid FROM ...)')
Following statements are also prohibited: CASE, WHEN or MATCH
There is also one main SQL extension:

l
IN and NOT IN will accept a partition group for the value list. E.g. 'zone IN layers.weathered' where
"layers" is a partition of the "zone" column that has a group called 'weathered'.
These are some examples of valid Leapfrog Geo query statements:

l
holeid in ('m-001', 'm-002')
holeid not in ('m-001', 'm-002')
holeid not like 'MAR%'
To enter a query that contains an apostrophe, enter two apostrophes. For example, the following query will
result in an error:
Adding the second apostrophe results in a valid query:
The Query box allows the following shortcut queries:

l
Typing a single word will match all hole-ids starting with that string. For example, typing "MAR" is a
shortcut for "holeid like 'MAR%'"
Typing a comma-separated list of words will match all hole-ids that exactly match the given words. For
example typing "M001, M002" is a shortcut for "holeid in ('M001', 'M002')".
Building a Query | 173
Building a Query
Many common queries can be built using the Build Query window:
This window aims to be easy to use rather than comprehensive in its support for the full Leapfrog Geo query
syntax. For more advanced queries, click on the Advanced button. See Advanced Query Building for more
information.
To add a criteria, click Column to view a dropdown list of columns available in the table. Select a Test and
enter a Value. What can be entered for the Value depends on the type of column and test selected.
Quotes are not required around text values entered in the value column as they are in SQL. Leapfrog Geo will
add quotes and brackets to the value "MX, PM" to make a valid SQL list of strings "('MX', 'PM')" when the
query is saved.
Click on the Apply button to apply to query to the context in which the dialog was opened.
Use the Delete button to delete the criteria in the selected row and the Add button to add a blank row.
Advanced Query Building

The Advanced Query window provides a powerful and flexible query building using the Leapfrog Geo query
language.
Enter the query in the Criteria to Match area on the left. The query is displayed as a tree structure with AND
and OR terms as the branch nodes and conditions as the leaves. Use the Delete button to delete a row from
the query and the Add button to add a blank row. The Check button can be used at any time to check if the
current query statement is valid. Below the buttons is a box showing the raw SQL form of the query.
Except for the arrow buttons, the buttons down the middle of the dialog are used for entering values into the
query. The arrow buttons are used for moving the currently selected criteria to a different position in the query.
The Date, List and Value buttons will open a builder dialog for the column selected in the current row. If there
is no column found or the column is of the wrong type, an error message is displayed.
The tree on the right contains all the columns available to the query. Double-click on a column name to insert it
into the query.
Working with Surfaces in Leapfrog Geo

In Leapfrog Geo, meshes are used to represent surfaces in the form of vertices and triangles that define the 3D
shape of the surface. Meshes can be open or closed.
Meshes are generated as part of the model-building process, but can also be imported into a project or created
directly in the project. Leapfrog Geo has several tools for adjusting meshes.
This section describes different aspects of working with surfaces in Leapfrog Geo.
Surface Resolution in Leapfrog Geo

In Leapfrog Geo, meshes are used to represent surfaces in the form of vertices and triangles that define the 3D
shape of the surface. The resolution of a surface is controlled by the size of the triangles used to create a
surface. A lower surface resolution value means smaller triangles and, therefore, a finer resolution. A higher
surface resolution value will take less time to process but the surface may not show the level of detail required.
When a surface is imported, Leapfrog Geo automatically sets a surface resolution based on the information in
the file. It is not possible to change the resolution of surfaces imported into Leapfrog Geo. The exception is
elevation grids (see Importing an Elevation Grid).
When surfaces are created, Leapfrog Geo sets a default resolution based on the data available. You can set a
lower value, but calculations will take longer. In addition, the resolution for many surfaces can be adaptive; that
is, areas closer to data will have a finer resolution than areas further away from data.
To see the effect of different resolution settings, consider a simple geological model of three rock types. Here,
the surface resolution is set to 50 and the adaptive isosurfacer is disabled:
Here, the resolution has been reduced, which results in smaller triangles:
For both resolution settings above, the triangles are the same size everywhere in each surface, even where
real data is available. Once the adaptive isosurfacer has been enabled, the triangles closer to the drillholes are
smaller than those further away:
Areas of the surface that have large triangles indicate that there is less data in those areas to guide the
interpolation of the surface.
In Leapfrog Geo, the resolution for different types of surfaces can be controlled as follows:
l
For geological models, a resolution can be set for the model as a whole, but individual surfaces can have
different settings. See Surface Resolution for a Geological Model.
For interpolants, the resolution of the output isosurfaces is controlled by a single setting that can be
overridden for individual surfaces. The adaptive option is not available for interpolant surfaces. See
Changing the Isosurface Parameters for a Numeric Interpolant and Changing Surfacing and Volume
Options for an Indicator Interpolant.
The resolution can be changed for editable interpolated meshes ( ) and can be adaptive. See Creating an
Interpolated Mesh.
When the topography has been defined using multiple data sources, the resolution can be set and the
adaptive option is available. See Changing Topography Settings.
Adding Data to Surfaces

Many surfaces can be refined by adding points, structural data, GISdata, polylines and values objects. If a
surface can be modified in this way, an Add menu will appear for the object when you right-click on it in the
Adjusting Surfaces | 177
project tree. For example, the Add menu for this contact surface shows the data types that can be used to
refine the surface:
Select the type of data you wish to use to modify the surface. Leapfrog Geo will display all the suitable objects
in the project. Select the required object and click OK.
A hyperlink to the added data will appear under the surface in the project tree. The added data can be removed
from the surface by expanding the surface in the project tree, then right-clicking on the hyperlinked data object
and selecting Remove.
Adjusting Surfaces
In Leapfrog Geo, many surfaces can be adjusted by applying a trend to the surface. To do this, add the surface
you wish to adjust to the scene so that it can be used in setting the trend. Double-click on the surface in the
project tree and select the Trend tab. Here, the Trend tab is displayed for a contact surface:
In this window, you can use the moving plane tool as a reference plane to set a trend. Often the easiest way to
do this is to click on the Draw plane line button ( ) and draw a plane line in the scene in the direction in which
you wish to adjust the surface. You may need to rotate the scene to see the plane properly.
Click on the plane to view the controls, which adjust the plane as follows:
l
The main axis of the moving plane is defined by the green line. In the Trend tab, the Along Pitch value
determines the strength of the variation along the main axis.
The second axis is defined to be in the plane at right angles (orthogonal) to the main axis.
Third axis is the axis pointing directly out of the plane. The Out of Plane variation setting applies to this
axis.
Once you have adjusted the plane to represent the trend you wish to use, click the Set From Plane button to
copy the moving plane settings.
The Set to list contains a number of different options Leapfrog Geo has generated based on the data used in
the project. Isotropic is the default option used when the surface was created. Settings made to other surfaces
in the project will also be listed, which makes it easy to apply the same settings to many surfaces.
Click OK to apply the changes.
How the moving plane can be used to adjust a surface in this manner is illustrated by the following intrusive
contact surface:
The intrusion surface has two bodies that are not connected, and we can apply a trend to connect the two
parts. Here, the intrusion surface has been hidden in the scene and the scene rotated to line up the QzP
segments. A plane line can then be drawn through the QzP segments:
Using the plane settings to adjust the surface results in the two parts of the intrusion joining up:
Creating and Applying Structural Trends | 179

Structural trends create a flat ellipsoid anisotropy that varies in direction with the mesh.
To create a new structural trend, right-click on the Structural Trends folder and select New Structural Trend.
The Structural Trend window will appear:
Click Add to select from the meshes available in the project. The list of meshes will be displayed:
Tick the box for each mesh required, then click OK. The selected meshes will be added to the Structural
Trend window:
The Strength parameter determines the shape of the ellipsoid, and the Range parameter indicates how far the
influence of this mesh reaches. If the Trend Type is Non-decaying, the distance from the mesh no longer
affects the anisotropy and the Range value cannot be set.
Trends that are Strongest along meshes or Blending can include a global trend. To set this, click on the
Global Mean Trend tab.
You can enter the trend manually or add the moving plane to the scene and set the trend using the moving
plane, as described in Adjusting Surfaces.
Enter a Name for the trend and click OK. The new trend will appear under the Structural Trends folder.
Displaying a Structural Trend | 181
Displaying a Structural Trend

When displayed in the scene, the trend is shown using disks placed on a regular grid:
The orientation of the disk gives the direction of the anisotropy. The size of a disk is proportional to the
anisotropy strength. Where there are no disks (or the size is very small) the trend is isotropic.
If the Trend Type is set to Non-decaying, the distance from the mesh no longer affects the anisotropy and all
disks have the same size:
The Blending option requires multiple meshes and blends them according to their individual strength settings.
A trend with higher strength makes a stronger impact on the blending. The blended trend is of decaying-type,
and its strength weakens further away from the mesh.
Applying a Structural Trend

To apply a structural trend to an interpolated editable mesh or an interpolant, double-click on the object in the
project tree and click on the Trend tab:
To apply a structural trend to an intrusion contact surface, enable Show additional surfacing options in the
Surfacing tab, then click on the Trend tab.
Click on Structural Trend, then select the required trend from the dropdown list. Click OK to apply the trend to
the surface.
When a structural trend is applied, surfaces may appear distorted further away from the data:
Editing a Surface with Polylines | 183
If this is the case, experiment with the Outside value setting. The Outside value is the long-range mean
value of the data. Setting a value of -1 for intrusions (where the positive values are on the inside) and +1 for
other surfaces will result in a smoother surface in most cases. For example, here, the Outside value has been
set to -1 for this intrusion, resulting in a much smoother surface:
Editing a Surface with Polylines

In Leapfrog Geo, many surfaces can be edited using polylines, including contact surfaces, geological model
extents and editable meshes.
To edit a surface with a polyline, it is a good idea to first add the object you wish to edit to the scene and draw a
slice across the scene where you plan to edit the surface. Next, right-click on the surface in the project tree and
select Edit > With Polyline or Edit > With Curved Polyline.
The drawing toolbar will appear for the type of polyline selected and a new polyline will be added to the scene.
Draw the polyline and adjust it as described in Drawing in 3D, then click the Save button ( ) to view the effect
of the polyline on the surface. To remove the polyline from the surface, expand the surface in the project tree.
Right-click on the polyline object and select Remove.
In cases where you have existing polyline edits (control points), you can import them and add them to the
surface. To do this, import the polylines to the Polylines folder, then add them to the surface by rightclicking on the surface and selecting Add > Points.
How a polyline can be used to edit a surface can be illustrated by the following surface, where a small volume
is disconnected from the main surface:
First, a slice is drawn through the surface where it will be edited:
Next, two lines are drawn to represent contacts that link up the surfaces:
The scene is then rotated and a new slice drawn in order to create another set of polylines perpendicular to the
first set:
Editing a Surface with Structural Data | 185
When the polyline edits are saved, the surface is updated to reflect the edits:
It is best to keep polyline edits to a minimum, as small edits can have significant effects on the shapes of
surfaces.
When you save the polyline, the object will be updated to reflect the additional points. The polyline will be
added to the project tree as part of the object that was edited. You can edit the polyline by double-clicking on it
or by right-clicking and selecting Edit Polyline or Edit Curved Polyline.
Editing a Surface with Structural Data

In Leapfrog Geo, many surfaces can be edited using structural data points drawn in the scene. Surfaces that
can be edited in this way include contact surfaces, geological model extents and interpolated editable meshes.
There are two ways to do this:
l
If you have a structural data table created in or imported into Leapfrog Geo that you want to use to adjust
the surface, right-click on the surface in the project tree and select Add > Structural Data. You will be
prompted to select from the structural data tables available in the project.
If you want to create structural data points to use to adjust the surface, right-click on the surface in the
project tree and select Edit > With Structural Data.
To edit a surface with structural data using the second option, it is a good idea to first add the object you wish to
edit to the scene. Next, right-click on the surface in the project tree and select the Edit > With Structural Data
option.
The structural data toolbar will appear and a new structural data object will be added to the scene. Draw the
structural data points and adjust them as described in Creating a New Structural Data Table, then click the
Save button ( ) to view the effect on the surface. Structural data tables created in this way cannot be used by
other objects in the project until the table has been shared. To do this, right-click on the table in the project tree
and select Share. The structural data table will be saved to the Structural Data folder.
To remove the structural data from the surface, expand the surface in the project tree. Right-click on the
structural data object and select Remove.
Extending a Surface
Geological models created in a Leapfrog Geo project automatically use the defined topography as an upper
boundary. If a model is defined that extends outside the topography, an error will occur. A similar error occurs
when surfaces used in geological models do not extend outside the models extents. In all cases, Leapfrog Geo
cannot process the surface and an error will be displayed.
In this example, an error has occurred during the process of creating a geological model because the
topography (yellow) does not enclose the model extents (pink):
In order for Leapfrog Geo to be able to divide the model into separate volumes, the topography needs to be
extended to enclose the models boundary or the models boundary needs to be restricted so it falls inside the
topography. When the model is processed, the following error results:
In this example, a fault surface (red) does not extend to the model boundary (pink):
Extending a Surface | 187
The surface needs to be extended or the model boundary needs to be restricted. Leapfrog Geo provides the
following options:
Selecting the Use Vertices option results in Leapfrog Geo generating the vertices (orange) to generate a new
surface (blue) that extends to the model boundary:
The solutions proposed will depend upon the data used to create the surfaces that conflict, but fall into three
broad categories:
l
Reduce the size of the models or interpolants extents. Click the Edit Extents button. This will open the
objects Boundary window and you can change the boundary.
Enlarge the topography by manually adjusting it. Click on the Edit Topography Extents button. This
option is only available when the topography has been created from more than one data source. See
Adding Height Data to the Topography and Changing Topography Settings.
Use the surfaces vertices to create the boundary or contact with extents large enough to be used in the
model or interpolant. Click the Use Vertices button to create a new vertices object and use it as the
source data for the boundary or contact.
If you have a solution to the problem that is not covered by the options presented, click Do Nothing. For
example:
l
If the topography is not large enough, there may be additional data available. If it is not already in the
project, import the data and add it to the topography as described in Adding Height Data to the
Topography.
If a surface being used to define a contact surface or boundary in a geological model or interpolant is not
large enough, you can add additional data to the surface, as described in Refining Extents and Editing
Contact Surfaces.
Using vertices to create the boundary or contact results in the creation of a new points object that will be saved
in the Points folder.
Earlier versions of Leapfrog Geo (up to 1.3) would automatically create the new vertices object and use it to
interpolate the surface.
In the case of using topography vertices as an upper boundary, the vertices will be applied as a lateral extent
and the defined topography will not be used. For example, here the geological model does not use the defined
topography but instead uses the GM: Topography surface created from the vertices:
Using topography vertices can take some time to process.

An additional disadvantage to using vertices is that the vertices object created is not linked to the original
object. When the object used to create the vertices changes, the vertices will not be updated.
Building and Refining Geological Models

The model building process involves several key steps:
l
Creating the project and setting up the modelling environment
Importing drillhole data and correcting errors
Importing other required data
Visualising the data in the scene and inspecting it to make sense of the model that will be built. It is at this
stage that you might create new drillhole data columns to select data that will be the basis of geological
models.
Creating a basic GM, then refining its boundary and defining a fault system
Modelling the contact surfaces
Setting the cutting relationships between the different contact surfaces and generating volumes
This part describes how to create and refine a geological model once the data required has been imported to the
project and a topography has been defined.
Building a Geological Model

Once a project has been set up and data imported, building a geological model is a process of successive
refinement made up of two main steps:
l
Defining the model extents.

Defining the internal structure. This involves generating contact surfaces that define the internal divisions
within the model boundaries. These internal divisions correspond to the contacts between lithological
units.
A fault system can also be defined that divides the geological model into subunits in which the internal
structure can be defined independent of the other subunits in the model.
This topic describes the first step in defining a geological model that is a simple volume enclosing the model
extents. See Refining a Geological Model for information about refining the boundaries and modelling the
lithological units.
A geological model can be created using only a basic set of parameters. The only parameter that cannot be
changed once the model has been created is the base lithology.
To create a new geological model, right-click on the Geological Models folder and select New Geological
Model. The New Geological Model window will open, together with a set of controls in the scene that help in
defining the model extents.
Selecting the Base Lithology

Select the drillhole data column that will be used as the basis of a model from the Base Lithology Column
dropdown list. If you do not wish to use lithology data as the basis for the model, select <None>. This may be
the case if, for example, you want to build a model from points data or from an imported map. If you select
<None>, you will need to manually define the lithologies that will be modelled.
If more than one column of lithology data is available for creating models, be sure to choose the correct one
as it cannot be changed once the initial model has been created. If after creating and modifying the model,
you find you need to modify the drillhole data, resulting in a new lithology column, you can use that new
column to create contact surfaces using Other Contacts options.
You can also filter the drillhole data used to build the geological model using query filters. To do so, tick the
Filter Data box and select the required query filter from the dropdown list. Once the model has been created,
you can remove the filter or select a different filter.
Setting the Surface Resolution

The surface resolution setting Leapfrog Geo automatically uses as the default is based on the data available in
the project. Set the surface resolution for the model as a whole and choose whether or not the resolution will be
adaptive. See Surface Resolution for a Geological Model for more information on the effects of these settings
and how they apply to individual contact surfaces.
Later, while refining the model, you can change the resolution of each surface and enable or disable adaptive
resolution.
Setting the Model Extents | 191
Setting the Model Extents

A geological model is initially created with a basic rectangular set of extents aligned with the south/north and
east/west axes. You can define the models extents in three ways:
l
Enter the coordinates.

Select Enclose Object and choose from the list of objects in the project. If the model is based on drillhole
data, select the lithology segments from the Enclose Object list.
Use the controls that appear in the scene. The orange handle adjusts the centre of the plane and the red
handles adjust the size.
See Setting Object Extents for more information.
Creating the Model

Enter a Name for the model that describes the purpose of the model. This Name will be used in naming the
objects that will be added to the model.
Click OK to create the new model. The new geological model will be created and added to the Geological
Models folder. The objects under the geological model in the project tree represent different parts of the model:
The Boundary object defines the limits of the geological model. When the model is first created, this is
the rectangular model extents. If a topography has been defined, it is automatically used for as the upper
boundary. See Modifying the Model Boundary for more information about modifying the boundary.
The Fault System object defines faults and their interactions in the model. See Creating a Faulted Model.
The Lithologies object describes all the lithological units to be modelled and the colours that are used to
display them on the screen. It is generated automatically from all the lithologies identified in drillhole data
selected when the model is created. If no column was selected, you will need to define the lithologies
manually before you start modelling the lithology layers.
The Surface Chronology object describes the contact surfaces in the model, organised in chronological
order, from youngest to oldest. These surfaces and their chronology determine how the volume inside the
model extents is divided into lithological units. When the model is first created, the Surface Chronology
is empty, but it will eventually hold all contact surfaces and inputs to them.
The Output Volumes folder contains all the volumes generated in building the geological model in
chronological order, from youngest to oldest. When the model is first created, the Surface Chronology is
empty and so there is only a single output volume that fills the models extents, called Unknown.
Display the geological model by dragging it into the scene or by right-clicking on it and selecting View Output
Volumes.
See also:
l
Viewing the Model in the Scene

The Output Volumes folder contains all the volumes generated in building a geological model.
When a geological model is first created, the only volume that appears under the Output Volumes folder will
be a volume called Unknown. Once contact surfaces have been generated and added to the Surface
Chronology object, new volumes will be generated and added to the Output Volumes folder.
To view the generated volumes in the scene, you can:
l
Drag the volumes into the scene, one by one
Drag the geological model object into the scene
Right-click on the Output Volumes folder and select View All
See Importing, Creating and Editing Meshes for more information on some of the options available for the
individual Output Volumes.
You can export all of the output volumes for a geological model in a single file. See Exporting Geological Model
Volumes and Surfaces for more information.

Creating a copy of a geological model is a useful way of experimenting with changes to a model.
To copy a geological model, right-click on it in the project tree and select Copy. Enter a name for the copy of
the model and click OK. The copy will be added to the project tree.

Creating a static copy preserves a snapshot of a geological model that does not change, even when changes
are made to the data on which the original model was dependent. This is a useful way of storing historical
models and comparing models. Static copies can be exported from Leapfrog Geo, as described in Exporting
Geological Model Volumes and Surfaces.
To create a static copy of a geological model, right-click on it in the project tree and select Static Copy. Enter a
name for the copy of the model and click OK. The copy will be added to the Geological Models folder.
In the project tree, the static copy is made up of the model volumes and a Legend object:
Exporting Geological Model Volumes and Surfaces | 193
When displayed in the scene, the copy will appear as a single line in the shape list. To control the colours used
to display the different volumes, double-click on the Legend object in the project tree or click on the Edit
Colours button in the shape list:
To view the date the static copy was created, right-click on it in the project tree and select Properties. The
date the copy was created is shown in the General tab.

There are three options for exporting a geological models output volumes and surfaces. These are:
l
Export an output volume or a surface as a mesh. Right-click on it in the project tree and click Export. You
will be prompted for a file name and location. See Exporting a Single Mesh.
Export an output volume as a thickness grid. Right-click on it in the project tree and click Export
Thickness Grid. See Exporting a Thickness Grid.
Export multiple output volumes and surfaces. Right-click on the geological model in the project tree and
select Export. See Exporting Multiple Meshes from Models and Interpolants.
When exporting output volumes, the Merge output lithology volumes setting in the geological models
General tab (see Refining a Geological Model) determines how the output volumes are handled when they are
exported. If this setting is enabled, internal walls and surface seams will be removed from volumes of the same
lithology.
Refining a Geological Model

Once a geological model has been created, you can change the models resolution and other basic settings by
double-clicking on the model in the project tree. The Geological Model window will open with the General tab
selected. The other tabs in the Geological Model window represent the different parts of the geological model.
It is generally more useful, however, to work with these parts of the model on an individual basis by either
double-clicking on the object in the project tree or right-clicking and seeing what options are available.
Base Lithology
Although the Base lithology column cannot be changed once a geological model has been created, you can
change the filters applied to the data. Any filters defined for the lithology table used to define the model can be
applied to the Base lithology column.
Surface Generation
The Surface resolution and Adaptive settings in the General tab apply to the model as a whole. These
settings can be overridden for individual surfaces. See Surface Resolution for a Geological Model.
If you will be exporting the contact surfaces for use in another application, you can set contact surfaces in the
model to snap to contact points. To do this, tick the Snap surfaces to contact points box and set the
Maximum snap distance. As with the resolution settings, the snap settings in the General tab apply to the
model as a whole, but can be overridden for individual surfaces.
Volume Generation
The Merge output lithology volumes setting determines whether or not output volumes of the same lithology
are merged when the volumes are exported. If this setting is enabled, internal walls and surface seams will be
removed from volumes of the same lithology. This processing can take some time, and so this setting is
disabled when a geological model is first created. Enable this setting if:
l
You will be using final output volumes as extents for other models. See Adjusting the Interpolant
Boundary.
You will be exporting output volumes for use in other modelling packages. See Exporting Geological
Model Volumes and Surfaces for more information.
Surface Resolution for a Geological Model

When you create a geological model (see Building a Geological Model), the surface resolution is set for the
model as a whole. When surfaces and boundaries are created as part of the model-building process, their
resolution is inherited from the geological model:
l
For deposit and erosion contact surfaces, stratigraphic sequences and model boundaries, the resolution
is the same as the geological model.
For intrusion contact surfaces, the resolution is half that set for the geological model.
You can change the resolution and enable or disable the adaptive isosurfacer on a surface-by-surface basis.
This is useful if you want to build a detailed model of some lithologies without increasing processing time for
other volumes.
Editing the Lithologies | 195
To change the resolution settings for a contact surface, double-click on the surface in the project tree, then
click on the Surfacing tab:
For a lateral extent or fault, simply double-click on the surface in the project tree to change its resolution
settings.
Untick the Inherit resolution from GM box to change the resolution settings for a surface. This setting may be
disabled, depending on the data used to create the boundary or surface.
The resolution of intrusion contact surfaces is also affected by the point generation parameters. See Changing
Intrusion Point Generation Parameters for more information.
Editing the Lithologies

To view the lithologies used for a geological model, you can:
l
Double-click on the geological model in the project tree and then click on the Lithologies tab.
Double-click on the Lithologies object for the geological model in the project tree.
All the lithologies defined for the geological model are displayed, together with the colours used to display
them:
Click a colour chip to change the colours used to display the lithologies.
If the geological model was created from drillhole data, the lithologies are automatically generated from that
data. There is also an additional lithology, Unknown, which is used to label lithologies that cannot be labelled
using known lithologies. This is the case when a geological model is first created and no contact surfaces have
been defined. The entire model volume has no identified lithologies and so is assigned as Unknown.
If there is no drillhole data in the project or if the model is not based on drillhole data, you will need to define the
lithologies one-by-one. To do this, click on the Add button, enter a name for the lithology and choose a colour.
Modifying the Model Boundary

Geological models are created with a basic set of rectangular extents that can then be refined using other data
in the project. These extents usually correspond to the ground surface and known boundaries. Creating lateral
extents can also be used to restrict modelling to a particular area of interest; for example, modelling can be
restricted to a known distance from drillholes by applying a distance function as a lateral extent. Extents do not
need to be strictly vertical surfaces.
When a topography is defined for the project, it will be automatically applied as a geological models upper
boundary when the model is created.
To create a lateral extent, expand the model in the project tree. Right-click on the Boundary object and select
from the New Lateral Extent options. Follow the prompts to create the lateral extent, which will then appear in
the project tree under the models Boundary object. For example, this geological model has two lateral
extents, one from a polyline and the other from GISdata:
New lateral extents are automatically applied to the boundary being modified. Leapfrog Geo often orients a new
lateral extent correctly, with red presenting the inside face of the lateral extent and blue representing the
outside face. If this is not the case, you can change the orientation by right-clicking on the lateral extent in the
project tree and selecting Swap Inside.
If you have defined a lateral extent and want to remove it from the model, there are two options. The first is to
right-click on the extent in the project tree and click Delete. This deletes the extent from the model, but does
not delete parent objects from the project unless they were created as part of the model, e.g. a polyline used as
a lateral extent but not shared within the project. Use this option only if you are sure you do not want to use the
extent. See Importing, Creating and Exporting Polylines for more information.
Creating a Lateral Extent from a Polyline | 197
The second method is useful if you are making changes to the extent and do not want to recompute the model
with each change. Double-click on the models Boundary object or double-click on the model and click on the
Boundary tab. The Boundaries part of the window lists all objects used as extents:
Untick the box for extents to temporarily disable them in the model. The model will be reprocessed, but you can
then work on the extent without reprocessing the model. Disabled extents will be marked as inactive in the
project tree:
For more information on creating the different types of lateral extents, see:
l
See Refining Extents for information about the different techniques for refining extents, including using
lithology contacts.
See Creating and Refining a Base for information about the techniques available for modifying the models
base.

See Modifying the Model Boundary for more general information about working with lateral extents.
When creating a lateral extent from a polyline, you can use a polyline that already exists in the project or you
can draw a new one. If you want to use an imported polyline, import it into the Polylines folder before creating
the new lateral extent.
To create a new lateral extent from a polyline, right-click on the Boundary object for the model you are working
on and select New Lateral Extent > From Polyline or New Lateral Extent > From Curved Polyline. The
New Lateral Extent window will appear:
You can draw the polyline in the scene directly by selecting the New Drawing option. You can also use any
polyline in the project by selecting the Existing option, then selecting the required object from the dropdown
list.
Select whether you wish to create a new Vertical Wall or Surface.
If you create the lateral extent as a Surface, you will be able to modify it using additional data, as described
in Refining Extents. You will also be able to apply a trend to the surface and edit the surface using a
polyline. A lateral extent created as a Vertical Wall, however, cannot be modified.
Click OK to generate the new extent. If you have chosen to create a New Drawing, the drawing controls will
appear in the scene and you can begin drawing, as described in Drawing in 3D.
The new lateral extent will appear in the project tree as part of the Boundary object.
In Leapfrog Geo, polylines can be created using the Polylines folder or as part of working with another tool. For
example, a polyline can be drawn to create a new lateral extent in a geological model. This polyline cannot be
used elsewhere in the project unless it has been shared.
To share a polyline, right-click on it and select Share. The object will then be available elsewhere in the project.
If the surface generated does not fit the polyline adequately, you can increase the quality of the fit by adding
more points to the polyline. See Drawing in 3D for information on adding points to polylines.

To create a new lateral extent from GIS vector data, that data must first be imported into the project.
Creating a Lateral Extent from Points | 199
Once the data you wish to use has been imported, right-click on the Boundary object for the geological model
you are working on and select New Lateral Extent > From GIS Vector Data. The Select Vector GIS Data
To Add window will be displayed, showing vector data available in the project:
Select the vector data you wish to use, then select whether the lateral extent will be a Vertical Wall or a
Surface.
If you create the lateral extent as a Surface, you will be able to modify it using additional data, as described
in Refining Extents. You will also be able to apply a trend to the surface and edit the surface using a
polyline. A lateral extent created as a Vertical Wall, however, cannot be modified.
If you select the Surface option, you can use the GISdata object with its own elevation data or projected onto
the topography:
Using the On Topography option makes sense for GIS data as it is, by nature, on the topography. The On
Topography option also mitigates any issues that may occur if elevation information in the GIS data object
conflicts with that in the project.
Click OK to create the new lateral extent. The new lateral extent will appear in the project tree as part of the
Boundary object.

To create a new lateral extent from points, that data must first be imported into the project.
Once the points data you wish to use has been imported, right-click on the Boundary object for the geological
model you are working on and select New Lateral Extent > From Points. The Select Points To Add window
will be displayed, showing points data available in the project:
Select the information you wish to use and click OK.

Lateral extents created in this way can be modified using additional data. See Refining Extents for more
information.

When creating a lateral extent from structural data, you can create a new structural data table or use a table
that already exists in the project.
l
If you want to create a new structural data table, add the object you wish to modify to the scene and orient
the scene for drawing the points, as described in Creating a New Structural Data Table.
If you want to use categories of structural data in creating the lateral extent, use an existing table and
create filters for those categories before creating the lateral extent.
Next, right-click on the Boundary object for the model you are working on and select New Lateral Extent >
From Structural Data. The New Lateral Extent window will appear:
Select the New Drawing option to draw the structural data points directly in the scene.
Creating a Lateral Extent from a Surface | 201
Select the Existing Structural Data option to use a table in the Structural Data folder. With this option, you
will be able to select from the categories available in the data table, if query filters have been created for those
categories:
Click OK to generate the new extent. If you have chosen to create a New Drawing, the drawing controls will
appear in the scene and you can begin drawing, as described in Creating a New Structural Data Table. To
share the new structural data table, right-click on it and select Share. The table will be saved to the Structural
Data folder.
information.

To create a new lateral extent from a surface, the surface must already exist in the project.
Once the surface you wish to use is in the project, right-click on the Boundary object and select New Lateral
Extent > From Surface. The Select Mesh to Add window will be displayed, showing the meshes available in
the project:
Select the surface you wish to use and click OK.

The new lateral extent will appear in the project tree under the Boundary object.
information.

Leapfrog Geo can calculate the distance to set of points and use the resulting distance buffer as a lateral
extent.
To create a new lateral extent from a distance buffer, right-click on the Boundary object for the geological
model you are working on and select New Lateral Extent > From Distance To Points. The Smoothed
Distance Buffer window will appear:
Select the Distance and set an Anisotropy, if required. Click OK to create the new lateral extent, which will
appear in the project tree as part of the Boundary object.
information.

A distance function calculates the distance to a set of points and can be used to bound a geological model. You
can use an existing distance function as a lateral extent or create a new one.
To use a distance function as a lateral extent, right-click on the Boundary object for the geological model you
are working on and select New Lateral Extent > From Distance Function. If there are no distance functions
in the project, you will be prompted to create a new one. See Creating and Editing a Distance Function for
information on defining and editing the distance function.
When there are already distance functions in the project, you will be prompted to choose between creating a
new function or using an existing one:
To use an existing function, select it from the dropdown list and set a Buffer distance. Click OK to create the
lateral extent.
When you create a new distance function, it will be part of the geological models Boundary object and will not
be available elsewhere in the project. To share it within the project, expand the lateral extent in the project tree
and right-click on the distance function. Select Share. The distance function will be saved to the Interpolants
folder.
Refining Extents
To change the resolution of a lateral extent or base, double-click on it in the project tree. See Surface
Resolution for a Geological Model for more information.
Creating and Refining a Base | 203
Extents created from points data, a distance to points function or structural data can be refined using other data
in the project. A lateral extent created from a polyline or GIS vector data can also be refined in this way if it was
created as a Surface rather than as a Vertical Wall.
The types of data that can be used to modify a lateral extent are:
l
Points
GIS vector data
Structural data
The data that can be used to modify the lateral extent depends on how the extent was created. To modify a
lateral extent, right-click on the lateral extent and select one of the options from the Add menu.
You can also:
l
Adjust the surface of lateral extents derived from points data, distance buffers and structural data. See
Adjusting Surfaces for more information.
Edit the lateral extent using a polyline. See Editing a Surface with Polylines for more information.
Edit the lateral extent using structural data. See Editing a Surface with Structural Data for more
information.
Creating and Refining a Base

Adding a base to a geological model is similar to adding lateral extents and many of the same techniques can
be used. See:
l
A base can also be created from the base lithology used to define the geological model or from other contacts
available in the project. Right-click on the Boundary object and select either New Base > From Base
Lithology or New Base > From Other Contacts.
The only difference in the two methods is that when creating a base from other contacts, you must first select
the lithology column from those available in the project.
When defining the base, select the First lithology and the contacts to use:
Click OK to create the base, which will appear under the Boundary object. The new base will automatically be
added to the model.
Each geological model can have only one base defined, so if you wish to define a new base, you must first
delete the existing base from the model. Do this by right-clicking on the Base object and selecting Delete. You
can also choose not to use the base you have defined. See Modifying the Model Boundary for more
information.
When the models base has been created from data other than a surface, it can be refined using other data in
the project. The types of data that can be used to modify base are:
l
Points
Lithology contacts
GIS vector data
Structural data
The techniques are the same as those used for refining lateral extents. See Refining Extents for more
information.
Creating a Faulted Model | 205
Creating a Faulted Model

Each geological model is created with a Fault System object that is used to construct faults. Once the faults
are active in the geological model, the geological model will be divided into separate fault blocks, which will
appear in the project tree as part of the model:
Each fault block has its own Surface Chronology, which can be modified without affecting other fault
blocks in the geological model. There is no top-level Surface Chronology for the geological model once
the Fault System has been activated. This means that lithology layers can be constructed for a faulted
model in two ways:
l
Define the Surface Chronology before enabling the Fault System. All surfaces defined for the
unfaulted model will automatically be copied to each fault block. Some surfaces defined for the model
as a whole will not occur in every fault block, which can be corrected by working with the surfaces in
each fault block.
Enable the Fault System before any surfaces are defined in the unfaulted model, then define the
Surface Chronology for each fault block. An aid to working with a faulted model in this way is the
ability to copy contact surfaces from one faulted block to another. See Copying the Surface
Chronology to an Empty Fault Block.
Which approach is best depends on the model being built. You may already know where the faults are and
choose to define them and subdivide the geological model before defining any lithology layers. On the other
hand, sometimes it is not apparent where the faults are until the layers have been built, in which case you
can add the new fault, activate it in the model, then work with the surfaces in each fault block.
When a geological model is first created, the Fault System object is empty. To create faults, right-click on the
Fault System object and select from the options available. Many of these options are similar to those for
creating lateral extents. For more information, see:
l
Faults created from polylines and GIS vector data can be created as vertical walls or surfaces. Faults
created as surfaces can be modified by adding further data in the same manner as lateral extents. See
Refining Extents for more information.

Creating a fault from the base lithology or other contacts is similar to creating contact surfaces. See New
Deposit/Erosion From the Base Lithology and New Deposit/Erosion From Other Lithology Contacts for more
information.
Faults will appear in the project tree as part of the Fault System object and can be expanded to show how they
were created:
Once all the faults required have been created, you can start defining the interactions between the faults by
double-clicking on the Fault System object. The Fault System window will be displayed:
Creating a Faulted Model | 207
To add an interaction, click on a fault, then click the Add button. Select the Interaction Type and set how the
faults interact:
Once you have defined each fault interaction, click OK to generate the fault system. Add the Fault System
object to the scene to check that the faults interact correctly.
You can also edit fault interactions by double-clicking on individual faults. The Edit Fault window will open,
which shows only the interactions for the selected fault:
Faults are not active in the geological model until the box is ticked for each fault in the Fault System
window. This means you can check the fault system without regenerating the geological model.
To activate the fault system in the geological model, double-click on the Fault System object once again and
tick the box for each fault. The model will be divided into separate fault blocks that can be worked with in a
similar manner to the geological model as a whole.
To view the faulted model in the scene, right-click on the model and select View Output Volumes. To view the
fault blocks without displaying the lithology layers, right-click on the model and select View Fault Block
Boundaries.
To work with a specific fault block, click on it in the scene. The window that appears displays the name of the
selected fault block:
You can also view the output volumes for each individual fault block by right-clicking on the fault block in the
project tree and selecting View Output Volumes.
Defining Contact Surfaces

Once a models boundaries and fault system have been defined, the next step is to define the internal structure.
This involves generating contact surfaces that correspond to the boundaries between lithological units, refining
the contact surfaces, arranging them in chronological order and then using the surfaces and the chronological
order to divide the geological model into units.
The Surface Chronology object represents the collection of contact surfaces and defines how they interact to
produce the volumes of the geological model. There are different types of contact surfaces that interact with
other surfaces and volumes in different ways:
l
Deposit contact surfaces do not cut older volumes. A volume defined by a deposit contact surface will,
therefore, appear conformably on top of older volumes.
Erosion contact surfaces cut other contact surfaces on the older side of the erosion contact surface.
Intrusion contact surfaces remove existing lithologies and replace them with the intrusive lithology on the
younger side of the contact surface. Often, the older side of an intrusion contact surface is labelled
Unknown as typically intrusions displace multiple older lithologies.
Vein contact surfaces remove existing lithologies and replace them with the vein lithology within the
boundaries defined by hangingwall and footwall surfaces and points and a reference surface.
Dividing the Geological Model Volume Using the Surface Chronology | 209
It is not necessary to model geological formations according to their corresponding contact surface type. For
example, it might make sense to model basement granite as a deposit rather than as an intrusion when it forms
the lowest layer in a geological model: if there are no older layers for an intrusion-type contact surface to
remove and it is apparent from the drillhole data that the lithology simply fills the lowermost parts of the model,
then it makes sense to model it as a deposit.
The rest of this topic describes the different types of contact surfaces and how they interact. For information on
creating the different types of contact surfaces, see:
l
Creating Veins
You can also create a stratigraphy object that defines a series of continuous layers and a vein system that
defines the interactions between a series of individual veins. See Creating Stratigraphic Sequences and
Creating a Vein System.
Dividing the Geological Model Volume Using the Surface Chronology

When a geological model is first created, it is simply a volume of lithology Unknown. The contact surfaces
and their order in the Surface Chronology determines how they divide this larger Unknown volume into
known lithological units. The scene below shows the Surface Chronology for four depositional contact
surfaces and two intrusional contact surfaces, bounded by the geological model extents (pink). The two
intrusive contacts are labelled as Unknown on the outside and the intrusive lithology on the inside:
The Surface Chronology is open, showing the contact surfaces in chronological order, with the youngest at
the top of the list. This is the order in which contact surfaces will be used to cut the Unknown volume of a
newly created model. The different types of contact surfaces cut older volumes in different ways, which are
described below.
For the model shown above, the first contact surface to cut the geological model volume is the oldest surface,
D5 - D4 contacts. The volume is divided into D5 (red) below and D4 (green) above:
When the next contact surface (D4 - D3 contacts) is enabled in the model, the volume above the contact
surface is labelled with the lithology assigned to the surfaces younger side (blue):
Therefore, any volume in a geological model is labelled with the lithology assigned to the youngest side of the
surface that last cut the volume.
Dividing the Geological Model Volume Using the Surface Chronology | 211
With a simple depositional geological model, as long as each side of each contact surface is assigned a
lithology, all volumes will be labelled with known lithologies. Intrusive contact surfaces, however, are often of
unknown lithology on the outside, as they contact multiple lithologies. When the two intrusive surfaces in the
model above are enabled but all depositional surfaces are disabled, the unknown lithology is replaced with each
intrusive lithology on the inner sides of each contact surface, but outside each intrusive contact surface the
lithology is not known:
If the outside of the older contact surface (green) is assigned a lithology (red), the volume outside each
intrusion is known and, therefore, the surrounding volume can be labelled:
If, however, the outside of the younger intrusion is known but the outside of the older intrusion is unknown, it is
not possible to determine the lithology of the surrounding volume as the lithology on the outer side of the
surface making the first cut is not known:
Younging Direction
An important factor in determining how surfaces interact is the younging direction of each surface. Each
contact surface has a younger side and an older side. Leapfrog Geo will, by default, put the younger side of a
contact surface up, since this is geologically reasonable in most situations. If, for example, you know that the
geology is overturned, you can change the younging direction once the surface has been created.
When contact surfaces are displayed in the scene, you can choose whether to display the surfaces using the
lithology or the younging direction. When the younging direction is displayed, the younger side is typically green
and the older side is brown:
When a contact surface is displayed using the younging direction, Leapfrog Geo by default colours the younger
side green and the older side brown.
Understanding how the different types of contact surface interact will help you in deciding how to model
different units and determine the younging direction.
Depositional and Erosional Contact Surfaces

Deposits appear conformably on top of underlying older volumes and do not occur in regions defined by older
deposits. Erosions, however, remove existing lithologies on the older side of the erosion. The difference
between the two types of contact surface is illustrated here, using a model made up of three deposits, A, B and
C:
Depositional and Erosional Contact Surfaces | 213
The contact surfaces that define the three output volumes are as follows, with the B-C contacts surface toward
the top of the model extents and the A-B contacts surface lower down:
Note that the output volumes are named according to the lithologies assigned to each side of the contact
surfaces that bound each volume.
An erosional contact surface (C-D contacts) added to the model cuts across the A-B and B-C contacts. The
younger (purple/D) side of the C-D contact surface faces up:
Once the model is recalculated, the erosion (D) has cut away the deposits on the older side of the erosion:
However, if the C-D contact surface is made a depositional surface, D only occurs on the younger side of the
C-D contact surface and does not cut away the A, B and C volumes:
Output volumes are named according to the lithologies assigned to each side of the contact surfaces that
bound each volume. For example, in the depositional model above, all volumes are labelled with a known
lithology, because each side of each contact surface has a lithology assigned and this can be used to identify
the lithology for each volume. If, however, no lithology is set for the youngest contact surface on the younger
side, the upper volume will be labelled Unknown:
Usually this is not an issue for depositional and erosional contact surfaces, with a known lithology assigned to
each side of the surface.
See Creating Depositional and Erosional Contact Surfaces for information on techniques for creating
depositional and erosional contact surfaces.
Intrusional Contact Surfaces | 215
Intrusional Contact Surfaces

An intrusion is a type of contact surface that removes existing lithologies and replaces them with the intrusive
lithology. An intrusional surface (E) added to the model as the youngest surface cuts away the other lithologies
wherever it occurs:
Note that the intrusive contact surface is labelled Unknown - E contacts, as the intrusion contacts multiple
units. This is typical of intrusive contact surfaces as an intrusion will usually displace multiple older lithologies.
Although the outside of the intrusive volume is not labelled with a lithology, the lithology of each volume the
intrusion comes into contact with can be known from the lithologies assigned to the depositional contact
surfaces.
However, when all contact surfaces are intrusive, the lithology of the surrounding volume cannot be known,
which results in intrusive volumes surrounded by an Unknown volume:
In this instance, the contact surfaces each have a known side and an unknown side:
Adding the drillholes to the scene helps in understanding what lithology the outside of each intrusion should be:
In this case, assigning the outside of both intrusions to AvT results in a model for which all volumes are labelled
with a known lithology:
See Creating Intrusional Contact Surfaces for information on techniques for creating intrusive contact
surfaces.
Vein Contact Surfaces

Veins remove existing lithologies and replace them with the vein lithology within the boundaries defined by
hangingwall and footwall surfaces and points and a reference surface. Here, a slice has been made horizontally
through a model made up of three deposits:
Vein Contact Surfaces | 217
Adding five dykes modelled as veins and enabling them in the model results in the veins cutting away each
deposit at the point of contact:
Here the sliced deposits are displayed but the veins are hidden in order to show how they cut away the
deposits:
The veins cut one another according to the chronological order set in the Surface Chronology. Vein In 1
(aqua) is the oldest vein and so is cut by the younger veins In 4 (yellow) and In 5 (green):
See Creating Veins for information on techniques for creating vein contact surfaces.
All contact surfaces except those created as part of a stratigraphic sequence can be modified using the
techniques described in Surface Resolution in Leapfrog Geo.

See Defining Contact Surfaces for more general information on the different types of contact surface and how
they interact.
To create a new depositional or erosional contact surface, right-click on the Surface Chronology object and
select one of the New Deposit or New Erosion options. See:
l

Lithology data is often the most reliable data source to use when building geological surfaces.
It is best to derive contact surfaces from lithology data, when it is available. There are two ways to create
contact surfaces from lithology data:
l
Using the base lithology column assigned when the model was created. This is the process described
below.
Using other lithology information available in the project. This is useful when you have created an
additional lithology column as part of correcting and working with the drillhole data. For example, if when
building a geological model it becomes apparent that changes need to be made to the drillhole data, you
can import additional data or create a new column using the split lithology, group lithology or interval
selection tools. See New Deposit/Erosion From Other Lithology Contacts for more information.
New Deposit/Erosion From the Base Lithology | 219
Selecting the From Base Lithology option opens the New Contact Points window:
Select the lithology you wish to use to create the surface from the Select primary lithology list; this will be the
older lithology (lower down) in the geological model. The Contacting/Avoided lithologies list shows the
lithologies that contact the primary lithology and the number of contacts. This helps in selecting which contacts
to use to create the contact surface.
Data can be composited at the drillhole level or on a surface-by-surface basis. To composite the data used to
generate the contact surface, click on the Compositing tab. See Compositing Category Data for more
information.
The options in the Lithology tab are useful for creating a surface when one lithology is interbedded with
another. For example, here we can see that the coarse sand is interbedded with alluvium:
The solution to this is to create two surfaces from the Alluvium contacts, one using the contacts above
(younger contacts) and the other using the contacts below (older contacts):
Note that the gravel contacts should be excluded for the surface created from the Use contacts below option,
as we can see from the drillhole data that gravel appears lower down in the model than the surface we are
creating. Do this by dragging the contacts that should be excluded to the Ignored lithologies list:
New Deposit/Erosion From the Base Lithology | 221
For complex geologies, the up and down directions for the surface may not be clear. If this is the case, untick
the Horizontal Plane box. A reference plane will appear in the scene, with the up-facing surface labelled A and
the downward-facing surface labelled B:
Controlling the position of the reference plane is similar to controlling the position of the moving plane:
l
Use the handles in the scene window to move the plane.

Set the Dip and Dip Azimuth values in the New Contact Points window. The reference plane will be
Once the reference plane is correctly oriented, click the Set From Plane button.
Setting a reference plane for contact points is different from applying a global trend to a surface. To apply a
global trend to a surface, double-click on the surface in the project tree and click on the Trend tab. See
Adjusting Surfaces.
The name Leapfrog Geo automatically assigns to a contact surface will be of the format Older Lithology Younger Lithology or Older Lithology contacts when the lithology contacts multiple lithologies.
Click OK to create the contact surface, which will appear in the project tree under the Surface Chronology.
Expand the surface in the project tree to see how it was made:
Double-click on the contact surface to edit the surface. Double-click on the contacts object ( ) to edit the
contacts and adjust the reference plane. Double-click on the segments object ( ) to edit compositing settings.
As further refinements are made to the surface, that information will also be added to the project tree. See
Editing Contact Surfaces for more information on refining the contact surface.
Add the contact surface to the scene to view it and check that it is oriented correctly. Here, the Basement
Granite contacts surface has been added to the scene, together with the drillholes:
Because the upper side of the surface represents contacts with multiple lithologies, it is labelled Unknown
and appears in the scene according to the colour assigned to Unknown (white).
The surface is oriented correctly, with the Basement Granite side at the bottom and the Unknown side facing
up, but if the younging direction was incorrect, correcting it is a simple process. Double-click on the surface in
the project tree to open the Edit window:
Click Swap Younging Direction to correct the orientation of the surface, which will be reflected in the scene,
if the contact surface is displayed. Note that changing the younging direction does not change which lithology
is older or younger.
See Editing Contact Surfaces for more information on the settings in this screen and the different techniques
that can be used for adjusting a contact surface.
Creating contact surfaces using the From Other Contacts option is useful when you have created an
additional lithology column as part of correcting and working with the drillhole data. For example, if when
New Deposit/Erosion From Other Data | 223
building a geological model it becomes apparent that changes need to be made to the drillhole data, you can
import additional data or create a new column using the split lithology, group lithology or interval selection tools.
See Splitting Lithologies, Grouping Lithologies and Selecting Intervals for more information.
The process is similar to creating a surface from the base lithology column, but you must first select the
lithology column you will use:
Select the First Lithology and Second Lithology, if known. Click OK. The New Contact Points window will
appear. Assign the Primary lithology, Contacting/Avoided lithologies and the Ignored lithologies. These
can only be selected from the models base lithology.
The rest of the process is similar to defining a contact surface from the base lithology. See New
Deposit/Erosion From the Base Lithology for more information.
Be sure to add the contact surface to the scene to view it and check that it is oriented correctly.
See Editing Contact Surfaces for more information on the different techniques that can be used for adjusting a
contact surface.
If suitable lithology data is not available, contact surfaces can be created from other data in the project, such as
GIS data, structural data, points, polylines and surfaces. The steps for creating depositional and erosional
contact surfaces from non-drillhole data are similar, regardless of the data used to create the surface:
l
Select the data object that will be used to define the surface. This must already be in the project, unless
you are using a polyline, in which case you are given the option to create a new polyline.
Select the First lithology and Second lithology. These are the lithologies that will be assigned to each
side of the contact surface. The lithologies you can choose from are those defined for the geological
model in the Lithologies object (see Editing the Lithologies).
Set whether the First lithology is older or younger than the Second lithology. Leapfrog Geo will, by
default, put the younger side of a contact surface up, but this can be changed later.
Here, a points data object is being used to create a contact surface:
For polylines, you first set the lithologies and the younging order:
Click OK to move on to the next step:
You can draw the polyline in the scene directly by selecting the New Drawing option. You can also use any
polyline in the project by selecting the Existing Polyline option. You can then select the required polyline from
the dropdown list.
The new contact surface will appear in the project tree under the Surface Chronology. Add the contact
surface to the scene to view it and check that it is oriented correctly.
Expand the surface in the project tree to see how it was made. Here, a number of surfaces have been created
using different types of data:
If creating a surface from a new polyline, the polyline will not be able to be used elsewhere in the project unless
it has been shared. To share the polyline, expand the contact surface in the project tree, right-click on the
polyline and select Share. The polyline will then be available elsewhere in the project.
As further refinements are made to the surface, that information will also be added to the contact surface in the
project tree. See Editing Contact Surfaces for more information on techniques that can be used to refine the
surface.

See Defining Contact Surfaces for more general information on the different types of contact surface and how
they interact.
Creating Intrusional Contact Surfaces | 225
To create a new intrusional contact surface, right-click on the Surface Chronology object and select one of
the New Intrusion options. The options for creating an intrusional contact surface from data other than drillhole
data are similar to those for creating depositional and erosional contact surfaces. One thing to keep in mind for
all intrusional contact surfaces is that an intrusion removes all the existing material on the younger side of the
contact surface. Therefore:
l
An intrusion should always have the younger side of its surface labelled with the intruded material.
The older side will typically be labelled Unknown as an intrusion will usually displace multiple older
lithologies.
See Defining Contact Surfaces for more information on creating contact surfaces from non-drillhole data.
The remainder of this topic describes creating intrusional contact surfaces from lithology data. There are two
options:
l
Using the base lithology used to define the geological model. Select New Intrusion > From Base
Lithology.
Using other contacts available in the project. Select New Intrusion > From Other Contacts.
The only difference in the two methods is that when creating an intrusion from other contacts, you must first
select the lithology column from those available in the project and specify the First lithology and Second
lithology.
Drag any younger lithologies to the Ignore list.
Compositing category data sorts segments into three categories, as described in Compositing Category Data.
For intrusional contact surfaces, these categories are:
l
Interior. This is the unit of interest and is equivalent to Primary.

Ignored. These are lithologies that are younger than the intrusive lithology and should, therefore, be
ignored in generating the contact surface.
Exterior. These are lithologies that occur outside of the unit of interest. For an intrusive lithology, other
lithologies the intrusion contacts should be classified as Exterior.
Select whether unspecified intervals should be treated as Ignored, Interior or Exterior.

Compositing Intrusions
Sometimes intrusive boundaries are poorly defined, with fragments of country rock intermixed with the
intrusive body. This can result in very small segments near the edges of the intrusion. Modelling the fine detail
is not always necessary, and so compositing can be used to smooth these boundaries. Compositing
parameters are set in the Compositing tab:
The settings in this tab are described in Compositing Category Data.

Editing Intrusions
Intrusional contact surfaces will appear in the project tree as part of the Surface Chronology object, together
with objects used to create the contact surface. See Editing Contact Surfaces for more information.
Displaying Intrusion Points
When you view the intrusion points in the scene, you can display only the contact points or all the points used
in creating the intrusion. To display all points, click on the points object ( ) in the shape list and tick the box for
Show volume points:
Creating Veins | 227
When the volume points are displayed, points with negative values are those outside the surface, while points
with positive values are those inside.
You can change the way intrusion points are generated by double-clicking on the points object (
project tree. See Changing Intrusion Point Generation Parameters.
) in the
Creating Veins
A vein is a type of contact surface that removes existing lithologies and replaces them with the vein lithology
within the boundaries defined by hangingwall and footwall surfaces constructed from selected input data. A
reference surface is defined that is the best fit for the hangingwall and footwall surfaces. The reference surface
can be curved or planar.
Options for creating veins are:
l
From lithology data, using the base lithology used to define the geological model or other contacts
available in the project. See Creating Veins From Lithology Contacts.
From GIS vector data, point data and polylines. See Creating Veins From Other Data.
Creating a vein system. This results in a single lithology that represents all the veins in a model. Veins
and their interactions are defined within the vein system. See Creating a Vein System.
Veins and vein systems are stored in the project tree as part of the Surface Chronology object. Further
modifications can be made to the vein by working on the objects that make up the vein. Expand the vein in the
project tree to view these objects.
Here, the hangingwall and footwall surfaces and points are displayed in the scene for a vein defined from
lithology data. The reference surface (yellow) and the vein segments (red and blue cylinders) used to create the
vein are also shown:
This vein is made up of:

l
Hangingwall and footwall surfaces ( ), which, when expanded, show the hangingwall and footwall data
objects used to create the surfaces.
Vein segments and pinch out segments ( ) extracted from drillhole data. These are only included when a
vein is created from lithology contacts.
A reference surface (
) calculated as the best fit surface using the hangingwall and footwall surfaces.
A boundary object ( ), which is empty when the vein is first created.
The hangingwall and footwall surfaces can be exported, as described in Exporting a Mesh and Exporting an
Elevation Grid. You can add points to the meshes by right-clicking on them and selecting Add. These surfaces
can also be edited with polylines; right-click on the surface and select one of the Edit options.
You can change the way the different objects that make up the vein are displayed using options in the shape
list:
Tools for refining veins differ from those for refining other types of contact surface. See:
l
Creating Veins From Lithology Contacts | 229
Creating Veins From Lithology Contacts

To create a new vein from lithology contacts, right-click on the Surface Chronology object and select either
New Vein > From Base Lithology or New Vein > From Other Contacts. The only difference in the two
methods is that when creating a vein from other contacts, you must first select the lithology column from those
available in the project and specify the Vein lithology and Outside lithology.
In the New Vein window, select the Vein lithology:
When extracting the hangingwall and footwall points, Leapfrog Geo automatically includes points at the ends of
the drillholes. To exclude these points, untick the Include points at the ends of holes. Once the vein has
been created, this setting can be changed by double-clicking on the vein segments object ( ) in the project
tree.
Click OK to create the vein, which will be added to the project tree as part of the Surface Chronology object.
See Creating Veins and Editing Contact Surfaces for more information on techniques that can be used to refine
the vein.
Creating Veins From Other Data
If suitable lithology data is not available, veins can be created from other data in the project, such as GIS data,
points and polylines. The steps for creating veins from non-drillhole data are similar, regardless of the data used
to create the surface:
l
Select the data objects for the Hangingwall and Footwall. These objects must already be in the project.
Select the Vein lithology and the Outside lithology. The lithologies you can choose from are those
defined for the geological model in the Lithologies object (see Editing the Lithologies).
Here, a points data object is being used to create a vein:
Click OK to create the new vein. The new contact surface will appear in the project tree under the Surface
Chronology. Expand the vein in the project tree to see how it was made.
As further refinements are made to the vein, that information will also be added to the vein in the project tree.
See Creating Veins and Editing Contact Surfaces for more information on techniques that can be used to refine
the vein.
Double-click on the vein ( ) in the project tree to edit basic settings. In the Surfacing tab, you can set the vein
thickness and pinch out options:
See Editing Contact Surfaces for information on the other settings you can change for the vein.
Setting the Vein Thickness

Veins have two thickness settings that force the vein to maintain a minimum or maximum thickness. If footwall
and hangingwall points are in pairs, it is not usually necessary to set the Minimum thickness or Maximum
thickness.
l
If the vein intersects itself, set the Minimum thickness to a value that is less than the minimum distance
between any two contact points.
If the vein widens out toward the edges of the geological model set the Maximum thickness to a value
that limits the effects of long segments.
If the Pinch out option is enabled, you will not be able to set the Minimum thickness.
If you set the Maximum thickness and Pinch out, the Pinch out is applied before the Maximum thickness.
Controlling Vein Pinch Out

Vein walls can be set to pinch out where drillhole data indicates they do not occur. This is achieved by creating
outside intervals on drillholes that do not have an interior vein segment. These intervals are then flipped with
respect to interior vein intervals, which, in effect means the footwall and hangingwall orientation has the
opposite sense to the nearest interior intervals. This forces the hangingwall and footwall surfaces to cross,
thereby pinching out.
Controlling Vein Pinch Out | 231
The Pinch out option is disabled when a vein is first created. To enable it, double-click on the vein in the project
tree and click on the Surfacing tab. Tick the box for Pinch out. Click OK to process the changes. The vein will
be updated and pinch out points ( ) will be added to the vein in the project tree.
For this vein, the surface occurs even where the vein lithology (green cylinders) does not occur and terminates
at the boundary of the geological model:
When the vein is set to pinch out, it tapers out where the vein lithology does not occur:
You can change how much the vein pinches out by excluding some pinch out segments. To do this, right-click
on the pinch out segments ( ) in the project tree and select Edit in Scene. The Pinch Out Properties window
will appear in the scene. Click on a segment to view information about it and set it to be Excluded, if required.
Note that the segments displayed in the scene below are the pinch out segments rather than the drillhole
segments shown in earlier scenes. The grey segments are excluded and the currently selected segment is
highlighted in the scene:
Click the Save button ( ) to view the effect of the excluded pinch out segments on the vein. Excluding the two
segments results in the vein terminating at the boundary of the geological model:

A vein includes a reference surface ( ) that is the best fit for the objects that make up the hangingwall and
footwall surfaces. There are two types of reference surface.
l
Curved. A curved reference surface can be used to make a vein follow the medial trend of the source
data, which leads to a more natural modelled shape. This is the type of reference surface used by default
Adding Data to the Reference Surface | 233
for veins created from lithology data. A curved reference surface can be used for veins created from other
types of data by adding data to the reference surface, as described below.
l
Planar. A planar reference surface is simply the best linear fit between the hangingwall and footwall
surfaces.
To adjust the reference surface ( ), double-click on it in the project tree or right-click on it and select Open.
The Reference Surface window will appear, showing the data used to for the reference surface. This is the
reference surface for a vein created from lithology data, and so the midpoints for the vein lithology are used as
Input values:
Adding Data to the Reference Surface

In order for a vein created from data other than lithology data to use a curved reference surface, other data must
be added to it. To add data, right-click on the reference surface in the project tree and select Add or Edit. Once
you have added data, the Curved reference surface option will be enabled in the Reference Data window
and the objects used to adjust the surface will appear in the list of Input values:
You can enable or disable the different data objects to see their effects on the vein. Click OK to process the
changes.
Using a Planar Reference Surface

Veins created from objects other than lithology data use a planar reference surface, and this option can also be
selected for veins created from lithology data. To use a planar reference surface, select the Planar reference
surface option in the Reference Surface window. The plane will be displayed in the scene, together with
handles that can be used to adjust it:
These handles work in the same manner as the moving plane controls, as described in Using the Moving
Plane.
Click OK to update the reference surface and view the results.
Once a vein has been created, you can change its boundary by:
l
Adding a polyline to the boundary
Adjusting the boundary plane
Adding a Polyline to the Vein Boundary | 235
Adding a Polyline to the Vein Boundary

To change the boundary using a polyline, right-click on the boundary object ( ) in the project tree and select
Edit. The current vein boundary will appear in the scene, together with drawing controls. Begin drawing the new
boundary, as described in Drawing With the Straight Line Tool, ensuring that the polyline drawn closes and
does not intersect itself.
When you save the boundary, the vein will be updated to reflect the changes to the boundary. If you want to
revert to the original boundary, right-click on the boundary object ( ) and select Delete Polyline.
Adjusting the Vein Boundary Plane

To adjust the boundary plane, right-click on the boundary object ( ) in the project tree and select Adjust
Plane. The Adjust Boundary Plane window will appear and handles to adjust the plane will appear in the
scene:
Click OK to apply the changes to the vein. To revert to the original boundary plane, right-click on the boundary
object and select Adjust Plane. In the Adjust Boundary Plane window, click on the Set to Default button
and click OK.
When a vein has been created from contact points, you can change the vein segment settings by doubleclicking on the vein segments object ( ) in the project tree. This opens the Edit Vein window.
When extracting the hangingwall and footwall points, Leapfrog Geo automatically includes points at the ends of
the drillholes. To exclude these points, untick the Include points at the ends of holes.
Changing the Orientation of Vein Segments

If you need to change the orientation of individual vein segments, e.g. for curved veins, you can do this by rightclicking on the vein segments object ( ) in the project tree and selecting Edit In Scene. If the vein segments
object is already in the scene, you can edit it by clicking the Edit button ( ) in the shape list.
The Vein Segment Orientations window will appear in the scene. Click on a vein segment to view information
about that segment:
Points A and B are labelled in the scene and can be changed by unticking the box for each point and choosing
whether to exclude the point or make it a hangingwall or footwall point. Once you have finished editing vein
segments, click the Save button ( ).
If you wish to return to the default settings, ensure the Auto box is ticked for each point.
Creating a Vein System

An alternative to defining veins one-by-one is to create a vein system. The vein system represents a single
lithology within the geological model. For example, for a model of a sedimentary system cross-cut by vertical
Creating a Vein System | 237
intersecting dykes, we could model the veins one-by-one, in which case each vein in the model is represented
by a separate lithology:
Modelled as a vein system, however, the veins are grouped into a vein system object ( ) that defines the
lithology for the vein system as a whole:
Note that the individual veins are part of the vein system.
The vein system defines how the veins interact, and veins can be added to it using the same techniques used
to create individual veins.
To create a vein system, right-click on the Surface Chronology and select New Vein System. In the window
that appears, select the Vein lithology:
If the vein system contacts only one lithology, set the Outside lithology. Otherwise, leave Outside lithology
set to Unknown.
Click OK. An empty vein system ( ) will be added to the project tree under the Surface Chronology. Doubleclick on it to change the lithologies.
Adding Veins to the Vein System
Once the vein system has been created, you can create veins using the same techniques described in
Creating Veins From Lithology Contacts and Creating Veins From Other Data.
To add veins to the vein system, right-click on the vein system and select one of the New Vein options. Veins
will appear in the project tree as part of the vein system object and can be expanded to show how they were
created.
Setting Vein Interactions
Once all the veins required have been created, you can start defining the interactions between them by doubleclicking on the vein system object ( ), then clicking on the Vein System tab:
The veins appear in the list from highest priority to lowest. Organise the veins in chronological order before
defining interactions. You cannot define an interaction for the highest priority vein in the list.
Creating Stratigraphic Sequences | 239
To add an interaction, click on a vein, then click the Add button. Select the Interaction Type and set how the
veins interact:
Once you have defined the required vein interactions, tick the box for each vein, then click OK. Add the Vein
System object to the scene to check that the veins interact correctly.
You can also edit vein interactions by double-clicking on the individual veins.
Veins and the vein system are not active in the geological model until the box is ticked for each vein in the
Edit Vein System window and the vein system is enabled in the Surface Chronology. This means you
can check the vein system without regenerating the geological model.
Creating Stratigraphic Sequences

When you have a series of continuous layers in a geological model, you can model each layer separately or you
can model them as a single stratigraphic sequence. Modelling a stratigraphic sequence works best for
sequences uniform in thickness with a consistent stacking order. Once you have created a stratigraphic
sequence, you can refine it by adding and removing layers and by adjusting the surfaces produced.
When a layer varies in thickness, the contact surface will not match the contact points in some places. This
will be a consideration when choosing whether to model layers as part of a stratigraphic sequence or as a
separate object.
To create a stratigraphic sequence, right-click on the Surface Chronology object and select New
Stratigraphy. The New Stratigraphic Sequence window will appear:
First select the Lithology Above and Lithology Below by selecting from the lithologies available in the
geological model:
Creating Stratigraphic Sequences | 241
Next, click the Add Lithologies button to view available lithologies:
Click OK to add the layers to the Stratigraphic Lithologies list, and then make sure they are arranged in the
correct order.
In the New Stratigraphic Sequence window, select whether the Bottom Contact Type is an erosion or a
deposit.
In the Surfacing tab, the Surface Stiffness controls the smallest bend a surface will make, where a higher
value will result in a smoother surface that bends less. The default value is 0, which is no stiffening.
The options for Snap to contact points are:
l
Inherit from GM. The setting for the geological model as a whole will be used. This is the default setting.
On. Set the Maximum snap distance.
Off.
All contact surfaces that make up a stratigraphic sequence will inherit the Snap to contact points setting from
the stratigraphy. See Refining a Geological Model for more information on this setting.
Click OK to create the stratigraphy, which will be added to the project tree as part of the Surface Chronology
object.
The objects that make up the stratigraphy include the generated contact surfaces and any points that result in
pinch-out errors:
Add the pinch-out errors object ( ) to the scene to view the points that are causing errors. To find out more
about the errors, right-click on the stratigraphy object and select List Errors.
In the Stratigraphic Errors window, information is provided about the different errors that occur in the
stratigraphic sequence, with pinch-out errors and other errors listed separately:
Use this information, together with the pinch-out error points, to either remove lithologies from the sequence or
adjust surfaces using any of the tools available for individual surfaces. Right-click on each contact surface in
the sequence to see what tools are available. You can also ignore an error by ticking the Ignored box.
Editing Contact Surfaces

Once a contact surface has been generated, you can refine it in several ways:
l
Add other data. Right-click on the surface to see the options available, which will depend on how the
surface was created.
Edit the surface with a polyline. Right-click on the surface in the project tree and select either Edit > With
Polyline or Edit > With Curved Polyline. See Editing a Surface with Polylines for more information.
Edit the surface extent using structural data. Right-click on the surface and select Edit > With Structural
Data. See Editing a Surface with Structural Data for more information.
You can edit the contacts used to generate the surface by expanding the contact surface in the project tree and
double-clicking on the points object ( or ).
You can also change settings for a surface by double-clicking on it in the project tree. The window that appears
has three tabs:
The Surfacing Tab | 243
The Surfacing Tab

See Surface Resolution for a Geological Model for information about the resolution settings in the Surfacing
tab.
For Snap to contact points, there is a general setting for the geological model as a whole, which is set in the
Geological Model > General tab (see Refining a Geological Model). For individual surfaces, the options are:
l
Inherit from GM. The setting for the geological model as a whole will be used. This is the default setting.
On. Set the Maximum snap distance.
Off.
You can set Snap to contact points for deposits, erosions and intrusions, but not veins. You can also set
Snap to contact points for a stratigraphic sequence, but not for the individual contact surfaces in the
sequence. All contact surfaces that make up a stratigraphic sequence will inherit the Snap to contact points
setting from the stratigraphy.
For intrusions, clicking Additional options adds Value Clipping and Interpolant tabs to the window and also
allows the use of a structural trend in the Trend tab:
See below for more information on these additional features.

For veins, there are additional settings related to vein thickness and vein pinch out. See Changing Vein
Surfacing Options.
The Trend Tab
You can also adjust the surface by applying a global trend. See Adjusting Surfaces.
For intrusions, you can also use a structural trend. To do this, click the Additional options button in the
Surfacing tab, then click on the Trend tab.
Click on Structural Trend, then select the required trend from the dropdown list. See Creating and Applying
Structural Trends for more information.
The Value Clipping Tab
The Value Clipping tab is only available for intrusive contact surfaces.
In the Value Clipping tab, you can manipulate the data distribution by clipping the data:
Clipping cuts off values that are outside the range set by the Lower bound and Upper bound values. For
example, if you change the Upper bound from 16.00 to 10.00, distance values above 10.00 will be regarded as
10.00.
The Interpolant Tab | 245
The Automatic clipping setting has different effects based on whether a global trend or structural trend is set in
the Trend tab:
l
When a global trend is applied, Leapfrog Geo automatically clips the values. That is, the Automatic
clipping setting is Do clipping and Leapfrog Geo sets the Lower bound and Upper bound from the
data. To disable clipping, untick Automatic clipping, then untick Do clipping. To change the Lower
bound and Upper bound, untick Automatic clipping, then change the values.
When a structural trend is applied, Leapfrog Geo automatically does not clip the values. To clip values,
untick Automatic clipping, then tick Do clipping. Again, Leapfrog Geo sets the Lower bound and
Upper bound values from the data and you can change them, if required.
The Interpolant Tab

The Interpolant tab is only available for intrusive contact surfaces. For more information on the settings in this
tab, see:
l
Copying the Surface Chronology to an Empty Fault Block

If you are working with a faulted model and have defined the Surface Chronology for one fault block, you can
copy the Surface Chronology to the empty fault blocks. To do this, right-click on the Surface Chronology for
which you have defined surfaces and select Copy Chronology To. In the window that appears, select the
fault blocks you want to copy contacts to and click OK. The surfaces will be copied and you can modify them
without affecting the surfaces in the other fault blocks.
Adding Contact Surfaces to the Surface Chronology

When you create a contact surface, it appears in the project tree under the Surface Chronology object, but
it is not enabled and, therefore, does not affect the geological model volumes. This means you can work on
the surface without having to reprocess the model whenever you make a change to the surface. In Leapfrog
Geo, you can easily define, enable and remove contact surfaces from a model, and you can experiment
with modelling lithologies using different techniques in order to arrive at a geologically reasonable model.
To add a contact surface to the surface chronology, double-click on the Surface Chronology object. The
Surface Chronology window will be displayed:
In the project tree, the surfaces are also arranged in chronological order:
The Surface Chronology determines the overall chronological order of the contact surfaces in the model. If
you build your models from the bottom up, you will find that often the contact surfaces are in the correct
chronological order when you first open the Surface Chronology window. However, you can easily rearrange
the chronology using the Younger and Older buttons. Tick the boxes for surfaces you wish to include in the
model. When you click OK, the included surfaces will be used to subdivide the geological model into
lithological layers. The volumes will appear in the Output Volumes folder.
Output volumes are named according to the lithologies assigned to each side of the contact surfaces that
bound each volume. See Defining Contact Surfaces for more information.
If you are working with a faulted model and have defined the Surface Chronology for one fault block, you
can copy the Surface Chronology to the empty fault blocks. See Copying the Surface Chronology to an
Empty Fault Block.
Refining Lithological Volumes | 247
Refining Lithological Volumes

When you have built a geological model and want to model further within one of the volumes, you can do this by
creating a refined geological model. This changes the way the original (parent) geological model is organised in
the project tree and makes it possible to create a sub-model within one or more of the lithological volumes.
Before starting to refine lithological volumes, it is a good idea to make a copy of the original geological
model.
To start refining a lithological volume, first create the refined geological model. To do this, right-click on the
Geological Models folder and select New Refined Model:
In the window that appears, select the geological model to refine and then select from its lithologies.
Next, set the Base lithology column, Filter data and Surface resolution. You cannot change the Base
lithology column once the refined geological model has been established, but you will be able to change the
resolution and data filter settings.
Click OK to create the refined lithology.
A new refined model ( ) will be created in the project tree and the parent geological model will be moved into it.
Here, a model called M Campaign GM has been used to created a new refined model, with the QzP volume
selected as the refined lithology ( ):
The sub-model ( ) is created inside the refined geological model and has its own Boundary, Lithologies,
Surface Chronology and Output Volumes objects.
You can work with the sub-model in the same manner you would a normal geological model. The exceptions
are:
l
The sub-models boundary cannot be refined directly. However, changes to the parent geological model
will be updated in the sub-models boundary.
The sub-model cannot have its own fault system. If the parent geological model is faulted, the sub-model
will have its own fault blocks in which you can work.
See Editing the Sub-Model for information on refining the sub-model.

You can still work with the parent geological model in the usual manner. Any changes to the parent geological
model that change the extents of the sub-model will be reflected in the sub-models boundary.
You can create additional sub-models by right-clicking on the refined model (
Lithology.
) and selecting Refine
A sub-model can be viewed and evaluated in the same manner as normal geological models. However, submodels cannot be used as layer guides for flow models.
Deleting the refined geological model deletes all models it contains. To return to the original project tree
organisation for a geological model, delete the sub-models:
Editing the Sub-Model | 249
Once there are no more sub-models, the refined model object is also deleted, leaving the parent geological
model.
The refined model has its own Lithologies table, which contains all the lithologies from the parent model and
any sub-model lithologies. You cannot add lithologies to this table. To add more lithologies to a refined model,
add them to the lithology table in either the sub-model or the parent geological model.
The refined model also has its own Output Volumes folder that combines information from the parent
geological model and the sub-model. If no surfaces have been created in the sub-model, adding the refined
model to the scene will simply display the volumes from the parent geological model. If surfaces have been
created in the sub-model, then the volumes of the sub-model will be displayed alongside the volumes from the
parent geological model.
Editing the Sub-Model

Work with the sub-model in the same manner described in Refining a Geological Model. See Defining Contact
Surfaces and Adding Contact Surfaces to the Surface Chronology.
The sub-model can have resolution settings that are different from those of the parent model. See Surface
Resolution in Leapfrog Geo and Surface Resolution for a Geological Model.
To change the lithologys resolution settings, double-click on the sub-model ( ) in the project tree. The
Geological Model window appears:
This window has only three tabs:

l
There is no Boundary tab because the sub-models boundary can only be modified by modifying the
parent geological model.
There is no Fault System tab because a sub-model cannot have its own fault system.
Building Interpolants
The FastRBF algorithm employs interpolation functions to estimate values from known data. From these
estimated values, geological surfaces are constructed as part of the model-building process.
With the Interpolant folder, you can create interpolants and change their parameters. There are three different
types of interpolant you can work with in the Interpolants folder:
l
A numeric interpolant describes a physical quantity that varies continuously in space. A numeric
interpolant can be used to model, for example, grade distribution, with isosurface values set to represent
both minimum concentrations of interest and regions of high value. See Creating a Numeric Interpolant.
An indicator interpolant calculates the likelihood that values will fall above and below a specific threshold.
An indicator interpolant can be used to produce a volume inside which further modelling is carried out. For
example, you can create an indicator interpolant for grade values above a certain threshold, and then use
the inside volume as a lateral extent for another model. See Creating an Indicator Interpolant.
A distance function calculates the distance to a set of points. As with an indicator interpolant, a distance
function is useful for restricting processing to a specific region. To do this, create a distance function,
select the objects to use, then add at least one buffer. You can then use one of the distance functions
isosurfaces as a lateral extent for another model. See Creating and Editing a Distance Function.
Values that can be interpolated include down-drillhole numeric data or points data.
Interpolant Functions
Leapfrog Geos powerful 3D interpolation engine can interpolate any numeric data (e.g. ore grade or piezometric
head measurements) to describe how a real, numerical quantity varies in three dimensional space.
Interpolation produces an estimate or interpolated value of a quantity that is not known at a point of interest
but is known at other points.
The simplest way to estimate values is to take the average of known values. Using this method, estimated
values are the same everywhere, regardless of the distance from known data. However, this is not ideal as it is
reasonable to assume that an estimated value will be more heavily influenced by nearby known values than by
those that are further away. The estimates for unknown points when varying the distance from known point
values is controlled by the interpolant function. Any interpolation function and the various parameters that can
be set for each will produce a model that fits all the known values, but they will produce different estimates for
the unknown points. It is important to select interpolation functions and parameters that make geologic sense.
It may be necessary to identify a location that models predict differently, and plan drillholes to identify the best
fit option.
Leapfrog Geo uses two main interpolant functions: the spheroidal interpolant function and the linear interpolant
function. See The Spheroidal Interpolant Function and The Linear Interpolant Function for more information.

In common cases, including when modelling most metallic ores, there is a finite range beyond which the
influence of the data should fall to zero. The spheriodal interpolant function can be used when modelling in
these cases.
The spheroidal interpolant function closely resembles a spherical variogram, which has a fixed range beyond
which the value is the constant sill. Similarly, the spheroidal interpolant function flattens out when the distance
from X is greater than a defined distance, the range. At the range, the function value is 96% of the sill with no
nugget, and beyond the range the function asymptotically approaches the sill. The chart below labels the y-axis
interpolant. A high value on this axis represents a greater uncertainty relating to the known value, given its
distance from X. Another way to think of this is that higher values on this axis represent a decreasing weight
given to the known value.
Known values within the range are weighted proportionally to the distance from X. Known values further from X
than the range will all be given approximately the same weight, and have about the same influence on the
unknown value.
Here, points A and B are near X and so have the greatest influence on the estimated value of point X. Points C
and D, however, are outside the range, which puts them on the flat part of the spheroidal interpolant curve; they
have roughly the same influence on the value of X, and both have significantly less influence than A or B:
SpheroidalInterpolant Parameters | 253
SpheroidalInterpolant Parameters
To edit the parameters for an interpolant, double-click on the interpolant in the project tree and click on the
Interpolant tab. The graph on the tab shows how the interpolant function values vary with distance and is
updated as you change interpolant parameters:
The yellow line indicates the Base Range. For this interpolant, the value of the interpolant is offset by the
value of Nugget.
Sill
The Sill defines the upper limit of the spheroidal interpolant function, where there ceases to be any correlation
between values. A spherical variogram reaches the sill at the range and stays there for increasing distances
beyond the range. A spheroidal interpolant approaches the sill near the range, and approaches it asymptotically
for increasing distances beyond the range. The distinction is insignificant.
Nugget
The Nugget represents a local anomaly in sampled values, one that is substantially different from what would
be predicted at that point, based on the surrounding data. Increasing the value of Nugget effectively places
more emphasis on the average values of surrounding samples and less on the actual data point, and can be
used to reduce noise caused by inaccurately measured samples.
Nugget to Sill Ratio

It is the Nugget to Sill ratio that determines the shape of the interpolant function. Multiplying both these
parameters by the same constant will result in an identical interpolant. Here, the interpolant on the left has a
nugget of 3 and a sill of 10; the one on the right has a nugget of 9 and a sill of 30. Note that because the nugget
and sill have been increased by the same factor, the function has the same shape.
Base Range
The Base Range is the distance at which the interpolant value is 96% of the Sill, with no Nugget. The Base
Range should be set to a distance that is not significantly less or greater than the distance between drillholes,
so it can reach between them. As a rule of thumb, it may be set to approximately twice the average distance
between drillholes.
Base Range | 255
Here the effect of different range settings on the value of X is demonstrated using our trivial example of four
drillholes:
When the range is set to 1, it is too small to describe any real effect between drillholes. When the range is set
to 30, distant drillholes have more influence, reducing the spatial continuity. Also illustrated is the range set to
approximately the average distance between drillholes (range = 4) and the range set to about twice the average
distance between drillholes (range = 8). Of these, the range set to 8 might be the best choice.
Alpha
The Alpha constant determines how steeply the interpolant rises toward the Sill. A low Alpha value will
produce an interpolant function that rises more steeply than a high Alpha value. A high Alpha value gives
points at intermediate distances more weighting, compared to lower Alpha values. This figure charts an
interpolant function for each alpha setting, using a nugget of 8, sill of 28, and range of 5000. A spherical
variogram function is included for comparative purposes. The inset provides a detailed view near the
intersection of the sill and range.
An alpha of 9 provides the curve that is closest in shape to a spherical variogram. In ideal situations, it would
probably be the first choice; however, high alpha values require more computation and processing time, as
more complex approximation calculations are required. A smaller value for alpha will result in shorter times to
evaluate the interpolant.
The following demonstrates the difference between alpha = 3 and alpha = 9:
There is a measurable difference between the estimates at the point being examined, but for many purposes,
using a lower alpha will result in satisfactory estimates and reduced processing time.
Drift | 257
The effect of the alpha parameter on the spheroidal interpolant in Leapfrog Geo is different to the effect of
the alpha parameter in Leapfrog Mining 2.x. If Alpha is set to 9 in Leapfrog Geo, the range corresponds to
the range in Leapfrog Mining 2.x. To convert from Leapfrog Mining 2.x to Leapfrog Geo where the alpha is
not 9, apply the following scale factors to the Leapfrog Mining 2.x range value to find the corresponding
range in Leapfrog Geo:
Alpha
Scale factor
1.39
1.11
1.03
For example, if in a Leapfrog Mining 2.x project, the alpha is 5 for a range of 100, the corresponding range in
Leapfrog Geo will be 111.
Drift
The Drift is a model of the value distribution away from data. It determines the behaviour a long way from
sampled data.
l
When set to Constant, the interpolant will go to the approximated declustered mean of the data.
When set to Linear, the interpolant will behave linearly away from data. This may result in negative
values.
When set to None, the interpolant will pull down to zero away from data.
Here, the three Drift options for the interpolant are shown evaluated on grids:
In this example, the boundary is larger than the extent of the data to illustrate the effect of different Drift
settings. The data extents are indicated by the pink box.
Away from the data, the value of the interpolant when Drift is Constant and Linear is not reasonable in this
case, given the distance from the data. The low value when Drift is None is more realistic, given the distance
from the data.
If when using the spheroidal interpolant you get a grade shell that fills the model extents, it is likely that the
mean value of the data is higher than the threshold chosen for the grade shell in question. If this occurs, try
setting the Drift to None.
Accuracy | 259
Accuracy
Leapfrog Geo estimates the Accuracy from the data values by taking a fraction of the smallest difference
between measured data values. Although there is the temptation to set the Accuracy as low as possible, there
is little point to specifying an Accuracy significantly smaller than the errors in the measured data. For example,
if values are specified to two decimal places, setting the Accuracy to 0.001 is more than adequate. Smaller
values will cause the interpolation to run more slowly and will degrade the interpolation result. For example,
when recording to two decimals, the range 0.035 to 0.044 will be recorded as 0.04. There is little point in setting
the accuracy to plus or minus 0.000001 when intrinsically values are only accurate to plus or minus 0.005.

Generally, estimates produced using the linear interpolant will strongly reflect values at nearby points and the
linear interpolant is a useful general-purpose interpolant for sparsely and/or irregularly sampled data. It works
well for lithology data, but is not appropriate for values with a distinct finite range of influence.
The linear interpolant function is multi-scale, and, therefore, is a good general purpose model. It works well for
lithology data, which often has localised pockets of high-resolution data. It can be used to quickly visualise
data trends and whether or not compositing or transforming values will be required. It is not appropriate for
values with a distinct finite range of influence as it aggressively extrapolates out from the data. Most ore grade
data is not well interpolated using a linear interpolant function.
The linear interpolant function simply assumes that known values closer to the point you wish to estimate have
a proportionally greater influence than points that are further away:
In the above diagram, points A and B will have the most effect on point X as they are closer to X than points C
and D. Using the linear interpolant function in Leapfrog Geo gives a value of 7.85, which is between the nearby
high grade values of A (10) and B (7). Because of their distance from X, the low grade values at C and D have a
much weaker effect on the estimate of point X, and they have not dragged the estimate for X lower.
Linear Interpolant Parameters

To edit the parameters for an interpolant, double-click on the interpolant in the project tree and click on the
Interpolant tab. The graph on the tab shows how the interpolant function values vary with distance and is
updated as you change interpolant parameters:
The yellow line indicates the Base Range. For this interpolant, the value of the interpolant is offset by the
value of Nugget.
Sill and Base Range | 261
Sill and Base Range

A linear interpolant has no sill or range in the traditional sense. Instead, the Sill and Base Range set the slope
of the interpolant. The Base Range is the distance at which the interpolant value is the Sill. The two
parameters sill and range are used instead of a single gradient parameter to permit switching between linear
and spheroidal interpolant functions without also manipulating these settings.
Nugget
The Nugget represents a local anomaly in values, one that is substantially different from what would be
predicted at that point based on the surrounding data. Increasing the value of Nugget effectively places more
emphasis on the average values of surrounding samples and less on the actual data point, and can be used to
reduce noise caused by inaccurately measured samples.
Drift
The Drift is a model of the value distribution away from data. It determines the behaviour a long way from
sampled data.
l
When set to Constant, the interpolant will go to the approximated declustered mean of the data.
When set to Linear, the interpolant will behave linearly away from data. This may result in negative
values.
Here, the two Drift options for the interpolant are shown evaluated on grids:
In this example, the boundary is larger than the extent of the data to illustrate the effect of different Drift
settings. The data extents are indicated by the pink box.
Accuracy
Leapfrog Geo estimates the Accuracy from the data values by taking a fraction of the smallest difference
between measured data values. Although there is the temptation to set the Accuracy as low as possible, there
is little point to specifying an Accuracy significantly smaller than the errors in the measured data. For example,
if values are specified to two decimal places, setting the Accuracy to 0.001 is more than adequate. Smaller
values will cause the interpolation to run more slowly and will degrade the interpolation result. For example,
when recording to two decimals, the range 0.035 to 0.044 will be recorded as 0.04. There is little point in asking
Leapfrog Geo to match a value to plus or minus 0.000001 when intrinsically that value is only accurate to plus
or minus 0.005.
Creating a Numeric Interpolant | 263
Creating a Numeric Interpolant

If the data is both regularly and adequately sampled, different interpolants will produce similar results. In
practice, however, it is rarely the case that data is so abundant and input is required to ensure an interpolant
produces geologically reasonable results. For this reason, only a basic set of parameters are required when a
numeric interpolant is first created. Once the model has been created, you can refine the model to factor in realworld observations and account for limitations in the data.
To create a numeric interpolant, right-click on the Interpolants folder and select New Interpolant. The New
Interpolant window will be displayed:
This window is divided into four parts that determine the values used to create the interpolant, the interpolant
boundary, any compositing options and general interpolant properties. Each of these options is described
below.
If you are unsure of some settings, most can be changed later. However, the Numeric values object
selected when the interpolant is created cannot be changed.

In the Values To Interpolate part of the New Interpolant window, you can select the values that will be used
and choose whether or not to filter the data and use a subset of those values in the interpolant.

You can build an interpolant from either:
l
Numeric data contained in imported drillhole data.
Points data imported into the Points folder.
All suitable data in the project is available from the Numeric values dropdown list.

If you have defined a query filter and wish to use it to create the interpolant, select the filter from the Query
filter list. Once the model has been created, you can remove the filter or select a different filter.

All available data can be used to generate the interpolant or the data can be filtered so that only the data that is
within the interpolant boundary or another boundary in the project influences the model. The Surface Filter
option is enabled by default, but if you wish to use all data in the project, untick the box for Surface Filter.
Otherwise, you can select the Interpolant Boundary or another boundary in the project.
You can use both the Query Filter option and the Surface Filter option together.

There are several ways to set the Interpolant Boundary:
l
Enter values to set a Custom boundary.
Use the controls in the scene to set the Custom boundary dimensions.
Select another object in the project from the Enclose Object list. The extents for that object will be used
as the basis for the Custom boundary dimensions.
Select another object in the project to use as the Interpolant Boundary. Click the Existing model
boundary or volume option and select the required object from the dropdown list.
Once the interpolant has been created, you can further modify its boundary. See Adjusting the Interpolant
Boundary.

When numeric values from drillhole data are used to create the interpolant, you can composite the data to
simplify the geology for the purposes of interpolating the data. If you do not have specific Compositing values
in mind, you may wish to leave this option blank as it can be changed once the model has been created. See
Setting Compositing Parameters for an Interpolant for more information.
If the numeric values selected have already been composited, the Compositing settings will not be available
for the interpolant.

The Surface resolution can be changed once the interpolant has been created, so setting a value in the New
Interpolant window is not vital. A lower value will produce more detail, but calculations will take longer.
The Volumes enclose option determines whether the interpolant volumes enclose Higher Values, Lower
Values or Intervals. Again, this option can be changed once the interpolant has been created.
Enter a Name for the new model and click OK.
The Numeric Interpolant in the Project Tree

The new interpolant will be created and added to the Interpolants folder. The new interpolant will contain five
other objects representing different parts of the interpolant, which can be expanded to show the inputs to each
The Numeric Interpolant in the Project Tree | 265
part of the interpolant:
The Boundary object that defines the limits of the interpolant. See Adjusting the Interpolant Boundary for
more information.
The Trend object that describes the trend applied in the interpolant. See Changing the Trend for an
Interpolant for more information.
A points data values object that contains all the data used in generating the interpolant. See Adjusting the
Values Used for more information.
An Isosurfaces folder that contains all the meshes generated in building the interpolant.
An Output Volumes folder that contains all the volumes generated in building the interpolant.
Other objects may appear in the project tree under the interpolant as you make changes to it.
You can display the interpolant by dragging it into the scene or by right-clicking on the interpolant and selecting
View Output Volumes or View Isosurfaces.
Once you have created an interpolant, you can adjust its properties by double-clicking on it. You can also
double-click on the individual objects that make up the interpolant. See Refining an Interpolant for more
information.
See also:
l
Viewing Numeric Interpolant Statistics

You can view the approximated mean for each output volume by right-clicking on the interpolant and selecting
Properties. Click on the Statistics tab:
Creating an Indicator Interpolant

An indicator interpolant is a useful way of creating a region of interest in which further processing can be carried
out. For example, you can use an indicator interpolant to define a volume that encloses the values that are
likely to be above a cut-off threshold and then carry out further interpolation inside that volume.
To create an indicator interpolant, right-click on the Interpolants folder and select New Indicator Interpolant.
The New Indicator Interpolant window will be displayed:
Selecting the Values Used | 267
This window is divided into four parts, which determine the values used to create the interpolant, the interpolant
boundary, any compositing options and general interpolant properties. Each of these options is described
below.
If you are unsure of some settings, most can be changed later. However, the Numeric values object
selected when the interpolant is created cannot be changed.

In the Values To Interpolate part of the New Indicator Interpolant window, you can select the values that
will be used and choose whether or not to filter the data and use a subset of those values in the interpolant.

You can build an interpolant from either:
l
Numeric data contained in imported drillhole data.
Points data imported into the Points folder.
All suitable data in the project is available from the Numeric values dropdown list.
Setting the Cut-off

The Cut-off value will be used to create two output volumes:
l
An Inside volume that encloses all values likely to be above or equal to the Cut-off value.
An Outside volume that enclose all values likely to be below the Cut-off value.
If you are unsure of what Cut-off value to use, you can view statistics on the distribution of the data and
change the Cut-off value once the interpolant has been created.
You can change the names of the Inside and Outside volumes once the interpolant has been created.

If you have defined a query filter and wish to use it to create the interpolant, select the filter from the Query
filter list. Once the model has been created, you can remove the filter or select a different filter.

All available data can be used to generate the interpolant or the data can be filtered so that only the data that is
within the interpolant boundary or another boundary in the project influences the interpolant. The Surface Filter
option is enabled by default, but if you wish to use all data in the project, untick the box for Surface Filter.
Otherwise, you can select the Interpolant Boundary or another boundary in the project.
You can use both the Query Filter option and the Surface Filter option together.

There are several ways to set the Interpolant Boundary:
l
Enter values to set a Custom boundary.
Use the controls in the scene to set the Custom boundary dimensions.
Select another object in the project from the Enclose Object list. The extents for that object will be used
as the basis for the Custom boundary dimensions.
Select another object in the project to use as the Interpolant Boundary. Click the Existing model
boundary or volume option and select the required object from the dropdown list.
Once the interpolant has been created, you can further modify its boundary. See Adjusting the Interpolant
Boundary.

When numeric values from drillhole data are used to create the interpolant, you can composite the data to
simplify the geology for the purposes of interpolating the data. If you do not have specific Compositing values
in mind, you may wish to leave this option blank as it can be changed once the model has been created. See
Setting Compositing Parameters for an Interpolant for more information.
If the numeric values selected have already been composited, the Compositing settings will not be available
for the interpolant.

The Surface resolution can be changed once the interpolant has been created, so setting a value in the New
Interpolant window is not vital. A lower value will produce more detail, but calculations will take longer.
An indicator interpolant produces a single isosurface that is used to determine the likelihood of values falling
inside or outside of the cut-off threshold. The Iso value can be set to values from 0.1 to 0.9. Clicking the
arrows changes the Iso value in steps of 0.1. To use a different value, enter it from the keyboard. Again, this
option can be changed once the interpolant has been created.
Enter a Name for the new model and click OK.
The Indicator Interpolant in the Project Tree

The new interpolant will be created and added to the Interpolants folder. The new interpolant will contain five
other objects representing different parts of the interpolant, which can be expanded to show the inputs to each
part of the interpolant:
The Indicator Interpolant in the Project Tree | 269
The Boundary object that defines the limits of the interpolant. See Adjusting the Interpolant Boundary for
more information.
The Trend object that describes the trend applied in the interpolant. See Changing the Trend for an
Interpolant for more information.
A points data values object that contains all the data used in generating the interpolant. See Adjusting the
Values Used for more information.
An isosurface set to the specified Iso value.
An Indicator Volume legend that defines the colours used to display the volumes.
An Output Volumes folder that contains the Inside and Outside volumes.
Other objects may appear in the project tree under the interpolant as you make changes to it.
You can display the interpolant by dragging it into the scene or by right-clicking on the interpolant and selecting
View Output Volumes or View Isosurfaces. You can also display the values ( ) used to create the
interpolant, which is useful in making decisions about the Cut-off value and the Iso value:
You can view the statistics for the indicator interpolant by right-clicking on the interpolant and selecting
Statistics. Use the information available to adjust the cut-off value and other interpolant properties:
Once you have created an interpolant, you can adjust its properties by double-clicking on it. You can also
double-click on the individual objects that make up the interpolant. See Refining an Interpolant for more
information.
See also:
l
Importing a Variogram Model

Leapfrog Geo can import spheroidal variogram models exported from Snowden Supervisor. The settings that
can be imported are:
l
The anisotropy settings in the Trend tab
The Nugget, Sill, Base Range and Alpha settings in the Interpolant tab
To import a variogram model, first create an interpolant. Next, right-click on the interpolant and select Import
Variogram Parameters. In the window that appears, navigate to the folder that contains the XML file and
select it. Click Open. The interpolant will be updated with the parameters in the XML file.
The imported variogram model overwrites the parameters in the interpolant, which cannot be undone. If you
wish to save the original settings, make a copy of the interpolant before importing the new parameters.
Once the interpolant has been updated, you can edit it further as described in Refining an Interpolant.
Refining an Interpolant | 271
Refining an Interpolant
To edit an interpolant, you can either double-click on the interpolant in the Interpolants folder or right-click and
select Open. The window that appears is divided into tabs that let you change the different objects that make
up the interpolant. Many of the options are the same for numeric and indicator interpolants.
When creating an interpolant, only a basic set of parameters is used. The Edit Interpolant and Edit Indicator
Interpolant windows provide finer controls over these basic parameters so you can refine the interpolant to
factor in real-world observations and account for limitations in the data. See:
l

There are two ways to view the values used in an interpolant:
l
Double-click on the interpolant in the project tree. The Edit Interpolant window will appear with the
Values tab open.
Double-click on the Values object for the interpolant in the project tree.
Although you cannot change the values used to create an interpolant, you can filter the values using the Query
Filter and Surface Filter options.
To apply a query filter, tick the Query Filter box and select the available queries from the list.
To change the object used as the Surface filter, select the required object from the list. Note that the list
contains an object that defines the interpolants own boundary, which can be adjusted in the Boundary tab.
Using Contour Lines to Adjust Values Used
You can also adjust the values using contour lines. To do this, expand the interpolant in the project tree. Rightclick on the values object and select New Contour Polyline:
In the window that appears, choose whether you will draw a new polyline or use one already in the project:
Only GIS lines, polylines imported into Leapfrog Geo or polylines created using the straight line drawing tool
can be used to create contour lines.
Enter the value to be used for the contour and a name for it. Click OK. If you have chosen the New Drawing
option, the new object will be created in the project tree and drawing tools will appear in the scene. Start
drawing in the scene as described in Drawing in 3D. When you have finished drawing, click the Save button (
). The new contour will automatically be added to the model and will appear in the project tree as part of the
interpolants values object.
When you double-click on the interpolant, the contour polylines used in the interpolant are listed in the Values
tab, under User contour values:
If you wish to remove a contour polyline from the interpolant, do so from the project tree. Right-click on the
polyline under the values object and select Remove.
Setting Compositing Parameters for an Interpolant | 273

An alternative to compositing numeric values in drillhole data is to composite the values used to generate an
interpolant. To do this, first create an interpolant from uncomposited data. There are two ways to change an
interpolants compositing settings:
l
Double-click on the interpolant in the project tree and select the Compositing tab.
Double-click on either the Composited Values or Uncomposited Values object in the project tree. This
object is part of the interpolants Values object.
The Edit Compositing Values window will appear:
See for more information on the effects of these settings.

Omitted segments are drillhole segments for which no replacement action have been assigned in the
Invalid Value Handling window. Omitted segments are excluded from numeric compositing so that
composite values will not be diluted. See for more information.

There are two ways to view the settings for an interpolants boundary:
l
Double-click on the interpolant in the project tree and then click on the Boundary tab.
Double-click on the Boundary object for the interpolant in the project tree.
Controls to adjust the boundary will also appear in the scene.
Tick the Use Topography box to use the topography as a boundary. The topography is normally not used as a
boundary for interpolants and so this option is disabled when an interpolant is first created.
The Boundaries list shows objects that have been used to modify the boundary. You can disable any of these
lateral extents by unticking the box.
Lateral extents can be used to restrict modelling to a particular area of interest; for example, modelling can be
restricted to a known distance from drillholes by applying a distance function as a lateral extent.
Extents do not need to be strictly vertical surfaces. For example, an interpolant could use a geological model
volume as a lateral extent, which is the case here, where interpolation has been restricted to a volume of
interest from a geological model:
In the project tree, we can see that the QzP volume from a geological model has been used as a lateral extent:
Techniques for creating lateral extents for interpolants are similar to those for creating lateral extents for
geological models. See Modifying the Model Boundary for more information.
Using a Model Volume | 275
Using a Model Volume

As described above, a volume from an existing model can be used as a lateral extent. To do this, right-click on
the interpolants Boundary object and select New Lateral Extent > From Model Volume. The Select
Boundary window will appear, showing all the volumes that can be used as a lateral extent:
Select the required volume and click OK. The volume will be added to the interpolants Boundary object.
If you are using a volume from a faulted geological model as a lateral extent, ensure that the Merge output
lithology volumes setting is enabled for the source geological model. This ensures that the volume being
used as an extent has no self-intersections. See Refining a Geological Model for more information on this
setting.

To clip data and apply a transformation to a numeric interpolant, double-click on the interpolant in the project
tree, then click on the Value Transform tab:
The options for Transform Type are None and Log. The logarithmic transform uses the logarithm to compress
the data values to a smaller range. This may be useful if the data range spans orders of magnitude. In order to
avoid issues with taking the logarithm of zero or negative numbers, a constant is added to the data to make the
minimum value positive, which is set in the Pre-log shift field. Before the logarithm is taken, a constant is
added so the minimum (after clipping) value is transformed to 0.0. Flexibility in choosing the pre-log shift is
provided since increasing this value away from zero can be used to reduce the effect of the logarithmic
transformation on the resultant isosurfaces.
Bin count defines the number of bins, where a larger bin count results in a finer histogram.
If you tick the Do pre-transform clipping option, you can set the Lower bound and the Upper bound to cut
off values that are too low or too high. For example, if you set the Upper bound from 14.00 to 10.00, grade
values above 10.00 will be regarded as 10.00.

To change the Cut-off value for an indicator interpolant, double-click on the interpolant in the project tree, then
click on the Cut-off tab. The tab also shows the distribution of the data used to create an indicator interpolate:
Bin count defines the number of bins, where a larger bin count results in a finer histogram.
Adjust the Cut-off value, if required, and click OKto process the changes.

The easiest way to change the trend applied to an interpolant is using a global trend set from the moving plane.
To do this, add the interpolant to the scene, then expand the interpolant in the project tree and double-click on
the Trend object. The Edit Trend window will appear.
You can also view the trend for an interpolant by double-clicking on it in the project tree, then clicking on the
Trend tab.
Using a Structural Trend | 277
Click View Plane to add the moving plane to the scene, then click on the plane to view its controls. You may
need to hide part of the interpolant to click on the moving plane:
You can also use the Set to list to choose different options Leapfrog Geo has generated based on the data
used to build the model. Isotropic is the default option used when the model is created.
The Ellipsoid Ratios determine the relative shape and strength of the ellipsoids in the scene, where:
l
The Maximum value is the relative strength in the direction of the green line on the moving plane.
The Intermed. value is the relative strength in the direction perpendicular to the green line on the moving
plane.
The Minimum value is the relative strength in the direction orthogonal to the plane.
Click OK to regenerate the model and view changes.

Using a Structural Trend
You can also set the trend in an interpolant from a structural trend. First, you must create or import the required
mesh and create a structural trend. See Creating and Applying Structural Trends for more information.
Once the structural trend has been created, add it to the interpolant by double-clicking on the interpolant in the
project tree, then clicking on the Trend tab. Select the Structural Trend option, then select the required trend
from the list:
Click OK. The trend will be added to the model and will appear as part of the model, as shown:
When you apply a structural trend, you cannot use the Linear interpolant. See Interpolant Functions for more
information.
Once a structural trend has been defined for the model, you can edit it by clicking on the trend hyperlink in the
project tree, then opening the structural trend applied to the interpolant. The Structural Trend window will
appear. See Creating and Applying Structural Trends for information on the settings in this screen.
The structural trend information included as part of the interpolant is a link to the original structural trend.
When you change the structural trend that is part of the interpolant, the changes are also made for the
original structural trend.
When a structural trend that is Strongest along meshes or Blending is used, the model will regress to the
global mean trend away from the meshes. The global trend that will be used is set in the Global Trend tab for
the structural trend.
Adjusting Interpolation Parameters | 279

In Leapfrog Geo, interpolation parameters can be adjusted by double-clicking on the interpolant in the project
tree, then clicking on the Interpolant tab:
Two models are available, the spheroidal interpolant and the linear interpolant. See The Spheroidal Interpolant
Function and The Linear Interpolant Function for more information on the settings in this tab.

You can change the parameters used to generate the isosurfaces of an interpolant by double-clicking on the
interpolant, then clicking on the Isosurfaces and Volumes tab.
To add a new isosurface, click the Add button and enter the required value. To delete an isosurface, click on it
in the list, then click the Remove button. You can also change the colours used to display the isosurfaces by
clicking on the colour chips.
If you find that grade shells are overlapping, the resolution may be too coarse. Set Default resolution to a
lower value in the Isosurfaces and Volumes tab. See .
Click OK to regenerate the interpolant and view changes.

To change the properties of the isosurface for an indicator interpolant, double-click on the interpolant in the
project tree, then click on the Volumes tab:
An alternative to double-clicking on the interpolant is to double-click on one of the output volumes, which opens
the Edit Indicator Interpolant window with the Volumes tab displayed.
The Iso value can be set to values from 0.1 to 0.9. Clicking the arrows changes the Iso value in steps of 0.1.
To use a different value, enter it from the keyboard.
Setting a lower value for Resolution will produce more detail, but calculations can take longer. See Surface
Resolution in Leapfrog Geo.
Use Volume filtering to discard smaller parts of the volumes in which you do not wish to carry out further
processing.
Creating and Editing a Distance Function

A distance function calculates the distance to a set of points.
Setting the Boundary | 281
To create a distance function, right-click on the Interpolants folder and select New Distance Function. The
New Distance Function window will be displayed:
This window is divided into four tabs. If you are unsure of some settings, most can be changed later. For a
basic distance function click Select Objects to select from the suitable objects available in the project, then
click on the Buffers tab to define at least one buffer so that the distance function can be visualised in the
scene.
Setting the Boundary

In the Boundary tab, you can set whether the function boundary is clipped or unclipped. No distance buffer
clipping is the default setting, but if you choose to clip the buffers, you can choose between:
l
Sharing another objects extents
Defining a set of extents that is independent of other objects in the project.
When you select the Shared with option, the distance function will be updated when the extents object it
shares is updated.
Setting a Trend
In the Trend tab, you can set a trend using the moving plane or by entering the required values. You can also
use the Set to list to choose different options used in the project. Isotropic is the default option used when the
function is created.
The Ellipsoid Ratios determine the relative shape and strength of the ellipsoids in the scene, where:
l
The Maximum value is the relative strength in the direction of the green line on the moving plane.
The Intermed. value is the relative strength in the direction perpendicular to the green line on the moving
plane.
The Minimum value is the relative strength in the direction orthogonal to the plane.
Adding Buffers
To add buffers, click on the Buffers tab, then click the Add button:
Enter the required value. To delete a buffer, click on it in the list, then click the Remove button. You can also
change the colours used to display the buffers by clicking on the colour chips.
There are two options for Buffer Type that affect how the buffers are calculated when more than one buffer is
used. Selecting Concentric produces higher distance buffers that include the lower distance buffers, whereas
selecting Intervals produces discrete, non-intersecting buffers.
The Default resolution setting is used for all new buffers and for existing buffers that use the default
resolution.
The New Distance Function in the Project Tree

Click OK to create the distance function, which will be added to the Interpolants folder. The new distance
function contains objects representing different parts of the function, which can be expanded to show the
inputs to each part of the function:
The Trend object that describes the trend applied.
Hyperlinks to objects used for the distance function.
An Isosurfaces folder that contains all the meshes generated in building the distance function.
A Buffers folder that contains all the distance buffer meshes.
Other objects may appear in the project tree under the function as you make changes to it.
Display the function by dragging it into the scene or by right-clicking on it and selecting View Buffers.
Once you have created a distance function, you can adjust its properties by double-clicking on it. You can also
double-click on the individual objects that make up the function.
Copying an Interpolant | 283
Creating a copy of an interpolant is a useful way of experimenting with changes to a model.
To copy an interpolant, right-click on it in the project tree and select Copy. Enter a name for the copy of the
interpolant and click OK. The copy will be added to the project tree.

Creating a static copy preserves a snapshot of an interpolant that does not change, even when changes are
made to the data on which the original model was dependent. This is a useful way of storing historical models
and comparing models. Static copies can be exported from Leapfrog Geo, as described in Exporting Interpolant
Volumes and Surfaces.
To create a static copy of an interpolant, right-click on it in the project tree and select Static Copy. Enter a
name for the copy of the model and click OK. The copy will be added to the Interpolants folder.
In the project tree, the static copy is made up of the interpolant volumes and a Legend object:
date the copy was created is in the General tab.

There are three options for exporting an interpolants output volumes and surfaces. These are:
l
Export an output volume or a surface as a mesh. Right-click on it in the project tree and click Export. You
will be prompted for a file name and location. See Exporting a Single Mesh.
Export an output volume as a thickness grid. Right-click on it in the project tree and click Export
Thickness Grid. See Exporting a Thickness Grid.
Export multiple output volumes and surfaces. Right-click on the interpolant in the project tree and select
Export. See Exporting Multiple Meshes from Models and Interpolants.
Combining Models
A combined model uses information from up to four geological models, interpolants and distance functions in
order to visualise relationships between different types of data in the project. For example, you could combine a
geological model with an interpolant to see what lithologies higher grades are occurring in.
To create a combined model, right-click on the Combined Models folder in the project tree and select New
Combined Model. In the window that appears, select the models you wish to combine, then click OK:
Once you have created a combined model, you cannot edit it to add new models or remove existing ones.
The next step is to select the output volumes to use in the combined model and arrange them in order of
priority. For this combined model, the QzP volume from the selected geological model will be subdivided using
information from the Au interpolant:
If you are using a distance buffer with concentric buffers, you will be able to select only one volume.
Click OK to generate the model, which will appear in the project tree in the Combined Models folder.
Add the model to the scene to view the results:
In the project tree, the combined model includes hyperlinks to the models used to create the combined model:
Changes made in the original models will be reflected in the combined model.
To change how the volumes from the source models are combined, double-click on the combined model in the
project tree. Once you have created a combined model, you cannot add new models to it, nor can you remove a
selected model.
See also:
l

Creating a static copy preserves a snapshot of a combined model that does not change, even when changes
are made to the data on which the original model was dependent. This is a useful way of storing historical
models and comparing models. Static copies can be exported from Leapfrog Geo, as described in Exporting a
Combined Model.
To create a static copy of a combined model, right-click on it in the project tree and select Static Copy. Enter a
name for the copy of the model and click OK. The copy will be added to the Combined Models folder.
Exporting a Combined Model | 287
In the project tree, the static copy is made up of the model volumes and a Legend object:
date the copy was created is in the General tab.

There are two options for exporting a combined models output volumes. These are:
l
Export an output volume as a mesh. Right-click on it in the project tree and click Export. You will be
prompted for a file name and location. See Exporting a Single Mesh.
Export multiple output volumes. Right-click on the combined model in the project tree and select Export.
See Exporting Multiple Meshes from Models and Interpolants.
Flow Modelling
Geological models created in Leapfrog Geo can be used as the basis for ModFlow and FEFLOW models. You
can create flow models directly in Leapfrog Geo and assign hydrological/material properties based on the
lithologies in the geological model. Flow models can be exported for use in other applications. You can also
import existing flow models and use them as the basis for the construction of new models. Flow models can be
displayed in the scene, and time-dependent data can also be visualised.
Working with ModFlow and FEFLOWmodels is available as part of the Hydrogeology module. Contact
Customer Support as described in Getting Support for more information about licensing the Hydrogeology
module.
If the Hydrogeology folder appears in the project tree as Restricted, you will be able to display models in
the scene and change how they are displayed, but you will not be able to make changes to the models
themselves.
All tools for building flow models are accessed by right-clicking on the Hydrogeology folder and the objects in
it. Imported objects and objects created while building a flow model are also stored in the Hydrogeology
folder, and more complex functions can be carried out by right-clicking on individual objects.
Working with ModFlow Models

These features are only available as part of the Hydrogeology module. See Flow Modelling for more
information.
Once you have created a geological model, you can use it as the basis for a ModFlow model. You can also
import existing ModFlow models and assign lithologies from a geological model.
Steps for creating a ModFlowmodel that can be exported and run outside Leapfrog Geo are:
1. Create a geological model.
2. Create the ModFlow model using the geological model to set the grid spacing and layers.
3. Evaluate the new model against a geological model, if it wasnt when it was created.
4. Edit the hydrological properties.
5. Export the ModFlow model to ModFlow or Groundwater Vistas.
Once the model has been processed outside of Leapfrog Geo, the model can be imported into Leapfrog Geo
and visualised in the scene.
Creating ModFlow models in Leapfrog Geo has the advantage that the resolution can be easily changed and
the properties of the grid can be made to honour boundaries defined in geological models. See Creating a New
ModFlow Model.
See Displaying ModFlow Models for information on options for displaying models in the scene.
Models created in Leapfrog Geo can be evaluated against a geological model when they are created. Models
imported into Leapfrog Geo or that were not evaluated when they were created can be evaluated as described
in Evaluating ModFlow Models.
Once a model has been defined and evaluated against a geological model, hydrological properties can be
assigned and the grid can be exported. See Setting Hydrological Properties for a ModFlow Model and Exporting
a ModFlow Model.
Creating a New ModFlow Model

This feature is only available as part of the Hydrogeology module. See Flow Modelling for more information.
Creating a New ModFlow Model | 291
To create a new ModFlow model, you must first have at least one geological model defined in the project. Once
this has been defined, add the geological model to the scene. Right-click on the Hydrogeology folder and
select New ModFlow Model. The New ModFlow Model window will be displayed, together with controls in
the scene that will help you to set the grid extents:
The new ModFlow grid will be based on the geological model in the Gridding from setting. If you wish to use a
geological model other than the one selected when the window is opened, select it from the dropdown list. The
grid dimensions will be updated in the scene.
If the Evaluate Gridded Model box is ticked, the selected geological model will be evaluated on the new grid
and set as the evaluation for export. If you do not wish to evaluate the geological model on the grid, untick the
box. You will still be able to use the layers in the geological model to control the grid layers.
The Preserve Existing Grid Lines option is used when setting a non-uniform grid in the scene window. If you
are going to define a non-uniform grid in this way, create the model with the Default Cell Size set to the
smallest cell size you wish to use, then edit it as described in Editing the ModFlow Model.
The grid should be slightly smaller than the selected geological model. Any ModFlow cells that exist outside
the geological model will be marked as inactive when the grid is exported to ModFlow.
Changing the Horizontal Grid Spacing

By default, the horizontal grid for the model is uniform, with the size of each cell set by the Default Cell Size
value. You can change the horizontal grid by editing row and column spacings. When you click on Row
Spacings or Column Spacings, the Edit Spacings window will be displayed:
Changes made in the Edit Spacings window will be reflected in the scene.
There are four ways to change the spacings:
l
Click on a value to edit it.

Divide a row or column. Click on a row or column, then on the Divide Row or Divide Column button. Two
new rows or columns will appear in the list.
Merge rows or columns. Hold down the Shift key while clicking on each item, then click on the Merge
Rows or Merge Columns button. The selected items will be combined.
Set uniform spacing on selected rows or columns. You will be prompted to enter the number of cells you
wish to create from the selected rows or columns.
Setting the Vertical Grid Layering | 293
Click OK.
For example, here, the rows and columns away from the model boundary have been divided to provide more
detail. The different spacings are reflected in the scene:
Use close spacing for steep gradients and increase or decrease spacing gradually.
Setting the Vertical Grid Layering

The vertical grid layers are based on the geological model selected in the New ModFlow Model window. Click
on the Layers tab to view the layers:
Initially, there are two layers equally spaced between the topography and the geological model. Change the
layers by clicking on Select Layer Guides button. The Layer Guides window will appear, showing the layers
available in the selected geological model:
If the grid is required to follow a geological model lithology contact surface, move the layer into the Selected
list and it will be honoured in the gridding process.
Click OK to return to the New ModFlow Model window, in which the selected layers will be displayed:
Click OK to create the new ModFlow grid, which will appear in the Hydrogeology folder. You can edit the
model by expanding it in the project tree and double-clicking on the grid object ( ). See Editing the ModFlow
Model.
For further information on working with the new model, see:
Editing the ModFlow Model | 295
Editing the ModFlow Model

Once you have created a ModFlow model, you can edit it by expanding the model in the project tree and doubleclicking on the grid object ( ). The Edit ModFlow Grid window will appear. You can edit the grid spacings as
described in Creating a New ModFlow Model, using the information in the scene window as a guide.
Another way to edit the grid is to use the controls in the scene to apply different cell size settings in different
parts of the grid. For example, you may want to define a grid that has smaller cells in the centre than at the
outer edges:
To set cell sizes in this way, it is best to start with a ModFlow model where the Default Cell Size is set to the
smallest cell size you will use in the model.
For this example, we will start with a new grid with a Default Cell Size of 50. We will set the adjacent cell size
to 100 and the cell size at the outer boundary to 200.
First, we need to reduce the area that uses the cell size of 50 by using the red handles in the scene:
The yellow box in the scene is the geological model extents for the model used to define the ModFlow model
and represents the unedited boundary of the ModFlow model.
Next, enter the cell size to use for the area adjacent to the 50.0 cells in the New Cell Size field. Drag the red
handles to enlarge the grid. The centre part of the grid is still set to 50, while the new area is set to 100:
If the Preserve Existing Grid Lines option is enabled, grid lines for cells already defined will not be moved
to account for new cells.
Importing a ModFlow Model | 297
Enter the next cell size in the New Cell Size field and use the handles to enlarge the grid again:
Click OK to update the grid.

For further information on working with the new model, see:
l
Importing a ModFlow Model

Leapfrog Geo imports .nam files and .mfi and .mfn variations of .nam files.
To import a ModFlow model, right-click on the Hydrogeology folder and select Import ModFlow Model.
Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the file location, and then will display the data in the file in the Import
ModFlow Model window:
If the world origin is available, the Grid Position will be displayed but cannot be edited.
Click OK to import the grid. The new ModFlow model will appear in the project tree in the Hydrogeology folder.
See Displaying ModFlow Models for information on displaying the model.
If the world origin was not available when the model was imported, you can change the Grid Position. To do
this, expand the imported model in the project tree and double-click on its grid object ( ).
To associate lithologies with the grid, see Evaluating ModFlow Models.

When a ModFlow model is exported, the evaluated geological model is used to assign lithologies to the cells in
the grid. If the grid has not been evaluated against a geological model, you must do so before you can edit the
hydrological properties and before you can export the grid.
To evaluate a ModFlow model, expand the model in the project tree, then right-click on the grid object ( ) and
select Evaluations. Although you can evaluate an interpolant or distance function, they cannot be exported
with the grid and are simply used for displaying the grid in Leapfrog Geo.
selected one or more objects, click OK. You will then be able to select the evaluations from the view list, as
described in Evaluating Objects.

For ModFlow models created in Leapfrog Geo, the evaluation used when creating the model will automatically
be assigned as the evaluation for export. A hydrological properties table ( ) will appear in the project tree as
part of the model.
If the model was imported into Leapfrog Geo or created without being evaluated against a geological model,
you will need to manually set the evaluation for export. To do this:
l
Evaluate the grid against one or more geological models, as described above.
Right-click on the model ( or )in the project tree and select Set Evaluation for Export. The Select
Evaluation window will appear showing all geological models evaluated on the grid. Select the required
evaluation and click OK.
A hydrological properties table will be added to the model in the project tree. Edit hydrological properties by
double-clicking on the table. See Setting Hydrological Properties for a ModFlow Model.

You can combine geological models and set the priority used for evaluation. This is useful when you have
geological models available that describe different parts of the area of interest or if you have a refined
geological model for part of the model. To combine geological models for evaluation, select the required models
in the Select Models To Evaluate window, then click on the Combined Evaluation button.
Using a Combined Evaluation | 299
In this example, there are three geological models selected:
The GM and GM from contacts models describe similar areas, but GM has more detail. The GM larger model
describes a larger area but with less detail. Tick the models to combine them and set their priority. Click OK to
create the combined evaluation, then click OK in the Select Models To Evaluate window. The combined
evaluation will be available from the view list.
The scene below shows an evaluation of these three geological models on a ModFlow grid, where each model
has been set to a single colour to show how the information from each model is combined:
The blue model has the highest priority and is used wherever there is information available. The green model
has the lowest priority and is used when there is no information from higher priority models.
This scene shows how the grid changes when the priority of the models is changed:
In this case, the purple model is now higher priority than the blue model and is used in preference to the blue
model. The green model remains the lowest priority model.
A combined evaluation can be selected as the evaluation for export.
window.

When a ModFlow model is evaluated against a geological model, a hydrological properties table ( ) is added to
the model in the project tree. You can edit hydrological properties by double-clicking on the table. You can also
open the table by right-clicking on the model in the project tree and selecting Edit Hydrological Properties.
If the model has been imported into Leapfrog Geo and has not yet been evaluated against a geological model,
you will be prompted to do so. Expand the model in the project tree, right-click on the grid object and select
Evaluate Geological Model. See Evaluating ModFlow Models for more information.
In the Edit Hydrological Properties window, click in a cell to edit a property:
When the model is exported, the zone numbers are used to indicate the assignment of lithologies to blocks and
are written to the ModFlow zoned layer properties flow (*.lpf) file. In the Edit Hydrological Properties window,
you can change the zone number for a lithology by clicking in a cell and entering a different zone number. If you
reorder the zones in this way, zone number conflicts will be highlighted in red:
Zone numbers must be unique and you will not be able to close the window and save data if there are conflicts.
If you click on the Sort Zone Numbers button, the zone numbers will be ordered from top to bottom.
Zone numbers should not be sorted once a model has been exported as the new numbers will not be
reflected in the exported model.
Displaying ModFlow Models | 301
Hydrological properties are assigned to model blocks based on the position of the blocks centroid relative to
the geological model used to evaluate the grid. The position of the centroid is calculated and Leapfrog Geo then
determines which lithology the centroid falls inside. The K values for the assigned lithology are assigned to the
entire block; there is no averaging.
If more than one object has been evaluated on the grid, you can set hydrological properties separately for each
evaluation. Select the required evaluation from the Evaluation dropdown list:
However, the only hydrological properties information that will be exported is that set for the evaluation to be
exported.

In the project tree, ModFlow models are made up of a grid object ( ), a Simulation Outputs folder and a
hydrological properties table ( ) object. If there is no hydrological properties table, an evaluation has not yet
been set for export. See Evaluating ModFlow Models for more information.
For ModFlow models created in and imported into Leapfrog Geo, dragging the model itself into the scene will
display the grid ( ) object. The different parts of the model can also be displayed.
Grid Display Options

Dragging a ModFlow model into the scene displays its grid object. Here, an imported model has been evaluated
against a geological model and added to the scene:
The viewing options available are the flat colour option, the evaluated geological model and zone data imported
with the model. Other inputs imported with a model will also be available from this list.
Grids can be displayed as points ( ) or as cells.
When a geological model evaluation or lithological zone information is displayed, you can also display a legend
for the grid.
When Show gaps (
) is enabled, the grid will be displayed with gaps visible between the cells.
Grid Display Options | 303
The Show inactive blocks ( ) option displays inactive cells in grey:
To display a single layer, tick the One layer box in the shape properties panel, then select the layer to display.
Head values and MT3D concentrations can also be imported and displayed. See Importing and Displaying
Head Values and MT3D Concentrations.

When a ModFlow model is displayed in the scene, you can view information about the individual cells in the
model by clicking on a block. The window that appears shows information about the selected block, including
its centroid and the lithology assigned to the block from the evaluated geological model. Information from all
geological models and interpolants the grid has been evaluated against will be displayed:

Leapfrog Geo imports the following output file formats:
l
Head values files in *.hds, *.hhd and *.hed formats
MT3D concentrations files in *.ucn format
To import head values or MT3D concentration files for a ModFlow model, right-click on the Simulation
Outputs folder and select the required option. Navigate to select the file, then click Open.
The information will be added to the ModFlow grid, and you can then select the head values and MT3D
concentrations in the shape list when you display the grid in the scene. If the output is time-dependent, a
timestep slider will be available from the shape properties panel. Click and drag the slider or click along the
timeline to view the different timesteps available:
Generating a Head Value Mesh | 305
Imported head values and MT3D concentrations are stored in the project tree in the Simulation Outputs folder:
To delete head values or MT3D concentrations, right-click on the object in the project tree and select Delete.
Once head values have been imported, you can generate a head value mesh. See Generating a Head Value
Mesh.

Once head values have been imported for a ModFlow model, you can generate a head value mesh. To do this,
expand the Simulation Outputs folder. Right-click on the head values object and select Generate Head
Value Mesh. The Generate Head Value Mesh window will appear, showing the layers in the model and the
timesteps available. Select the layer of the model you wish to generate a head value mesh for, then choose the
heads. Click OK to create the mesh, which will be saved to the Meshes folder.

Leapfrog Geo has three options for exporting ModFlow grids:
l
Export the grid as a ModFlow file.

Export for Groundwater Vistas. Use this option the first time you export a grid for use in Groundwater
Vistas.
Export a Groundwater Vistas update. Use this option to generate a set of files that can be imported into
Groundwater Vistas as an update.
The Groundwater Vistas options include a zoned layer properties flow (*.lpf) file that includes information about
the zones in the grid.
Exporting a Grid as a ModFlow File

To export a grid as a ModFlow file for use in a package other than Groundwater Vistas, right-click on the grid in
the project tree and select Export to ModFlow. You will be prompted to choose a File name and location.
Select the options required, then click Save.
Exporting a Grid for Groundwater Vistas

To export a grid for use in Groundwater Vistas for the first time, right-click on the grid in the project tree and
select Export to ModFlow for GWV. You will be prompted to choose a File name and location. Select the
options required, then click Save.
If you have previously exported the grid to Groundwater Vistas and have made changes to the grid, use the
Export to GWV Updates option.
Exporting a Grid as a Groundwater Vistas Update

If you have exported a grid to Groundwater Vistas but then make changes to the Leapfrog Geo model, you can
export the changes to the model. The set of files containing the changes can then be imported to Groundwater
Vistas.
To export a Groundwater Vistas update, right-click on the grid in the project tree and select Export GWV
Updates. The Update Groundwater Vistas window will appear listing the files that will be exported. Enter a
Base file name to differentiate the original files from the updates. Click Export. The files will be saved in the
specified directory.
Working with FEFLOW Models | 307
Working with FEFLOW Models

These features are only available as part of the Hydrogeology module. See Flow Modelling for more
information.
In Leapfrog Geo, creating a 3D FEFLOW model requires:
l
A geological model that will be used to assign lithologies to the FEFLOW models blocks.
A 2D grid that defines the block size, boundaries and surface features.
Steps for creating a 3D FEFLOWmodel that can be exported and run outside Leapfrog Geo are:
1. Create a geological model.
2. Create and refine a 2D model in Leapfrog Geo or import a FEFLOW model.
3. Create the 3D model from the 2D model or another 3D model in the project.
4. Evaluate the new 3D model against a geological model.
5. Edit the material types.
6. Export the 3D FEFLOW model.
Once the model has been processed outside of Leapfrog Geo, a results file can be saved that can be imported
into Leapfrog Geo and visualised in the scene.
A 2D grid can be created in or imported into Leapfrog Geo. A 3D grid can also be used, in which case the layer
information is not used in creating the 3D grid. Creating the 2D grid in Leapfrog Geo provides the most
flexibility, as the block sizes can easily be changed, the boundaries modified and features added to provide
finer resolution where there is more data available.
For information about creating 2D and 3D grids, see Creating a 2D FEFLOW Model and Creating a 3D
FEFLOW Model.
You can also import FEFLOW problem files and result files, visualise them in Leapfrog Geo and use them as
the basis for new models. See Importing a FEFLOW Grid.
See Displaying FEFLOW Models for information on options for displaying FEFLOW models in the scene.
3D grids created in Leapfrog Geo can be evaluated against a geological model when they are created. Grids
imported into Leapfrog Geo or that were not evaluated when they were created can be evaluated as described
in Evaluating FEFLOW Models.
Once a model has been defined and evaluated against a geological model, material types can be assigned and
the grid can be exported. See Setting Material Types for a FEFLOW Model and Exporting a FEFLOW Model.

In the project tree, 3D FEFLOW models are made up of a grid object representing the finite elements, a nodes
object and a material types table ( ) object. If there is no material types table, an evaluation has not yet been
set for export. See Evaluating FEFLOW Models for more information.
A 2D FEFLOW grid is made up of a grid object and a nodes object. Here, three types of FEFLOW models are
shown expanded in the project tree:
l
Feflow 3D Simulation is a 3D model created in Leapfrog Geo.
Feflow 2D Simulation is a 2D model created in Leapfrog Geo.
Feflow Results is an imported 3D model (DAC file).
From the information in the project tree, we can see that:

l
The 3D simulation created in Leapfrog Geo (
) uses the GM geological model to define the layers.
The 2D simulation created in Leapfrog Geo (

collar points added as a feature.
) uses the GM geological model as a boundary and has had
The imported results model (
) includes a number of simulation outputs.
For each type of FEFLOWmodel, dragging the model itself into the scene will display the grid ( ) object. The
different parts of the model can also be displayed.
Displaying a 3D Model | 309
Dragging a 3D simulation into the scene displays its grid object, which represents the finite elements. Here, a
3D model created in Leapfrog Geo ( ) has been added to the scene:
There are only two viewing options available from the shape list, a flat colour and the geological model
evaluation for the grid. For 3D models imported into Leapfrog Geo, you can display the model using other
information available for the grid, such as conductivity data. This is available from the view list:
Grids for 3D models can be displayed as points ( ) or as blocks. You can also display a legend for the grid
when a geological model evaluation is displayed.
To display a single layer, tick the One layer box in the shape properties panel, then select the layer to display.
You can display the nodes by adding the nodes ( ) object to the scene. When a model with results is
displayed, the simulation outputs can be displayed when the nodes are viewed in the scene. Here, the nodes
for an imported results file have been added to the scene. The heads are displayed for a single layer:
When the results are time-dependent, a timestep slider will be available from the shape properties panel. Click
and drag the slider or click along the timeline to view the different timesteps available.
As with 3D models, dragging a 2D model into the scene displays its grid object. Here, a 2D model created in
Leapfrog Geo ( ) has been added to the scene and viewed from above:
Viewing Block Information | 311
Also in the scene is a collar points object that shows collar points that have been added to the grid as a feature.
2D grids can be viewed as points or as blocks. As with imported 3D grids, an imported 2D grid can also be
displayed using other information available for the grid.
Other viewing options are available for 2D grids created in Leapfrog Geo. These are useful in refining a 2D grid
and are described in Creating a 2D FEFLOW Model.

When a FEFLOW model is displayed in the scene, you can view information about the individual blocks in the
model by clicking on a block. The window that appears shows information about the selected block, including
its centroid and the lithology assigned to the block from the evaluated geological model:
Information from all geological models and interpolants the grid has been evaluated against will be displayed:
Importing a FEFLOW Grid

You can import 2D and 3D FEFLOW grids and use them as the basis for new models. Leapfrog Geo imports
two types of FEFLOW files:
l
FEFLOW problem files (*.fem) in ASCII format. Importing these files results in a new 2D or 3D model with
a grid and nodes.
FEFLOWresults files (*.dac). Importing these files results in a new 3D model with a grid, nodes and
simulation outputs.
To import a FEFLOW grid or results file, right-click on the Hydrogeology folder and select one of the Import
FEFLOW options. Leapfrog Geo will ask you to specify the file location. Click Open to import the file.
The new FEFLOW grid will appear in the project tree under the Hydrogeology folder. To use the imported grid
or results file as the basis for a new FEFLOW model, see Creating a 3D FEFLOW Model.
To associate lithologies with a 3D grid, see Setting Material Types for a FEFLOW Model.
See Displaying FEFLOW Models for information about displaying the FEFLOW grid in the scene window.

A 2D FEFLOW model defines the block size, boundaries and surface features for a 3D FEFLOWmodel.
Although existing 2D grids can be imported into Leapfrog Geo and used for creating 3D models, creating the 2D
grid in Leapfrog Geo provides the most flexibility, as the block sizes can easily be changed, the boundaries
modified and features added to provide finer resolution where there is more data available.
Creating a 2D FEFLOW Model | 313
It is not necessary to create a geological model before creating a 2D grid. However, you will not be able to
create a 3D grid until a geological model has been created. Therefore, it is a good idea to create the geological
model first, and its dimensions can be used in defining the boundary of the 2D grid.
To create a 2D grid, right-click on the Hydrogeology folder and select New 2D FEFLOWModel. The New
2D FEFLOW Grid window will appear:
All settings can be changed once the grid has been created. It is, therefore, reasonable to accept the default
settings and create the grid, then add it to the scene and begin refining it. Click OK to create the initial grid.
In the project tree, a 2D FEFLOW grid is made up of a grid object and a nodes object, as described in
Displaying FEFLOW Models. Here, a newly-created grid with a rectangular boundary appears in the project
tree:
Expand the grid in the project tree and double-click on the grid object ( ) to open the Edit 2D FEFLOW Grid
window. The Features tab will be displayed. When a grid is first created, this window will be empty, but once
features have been added, you can enable them in this tab.
Click on the Boundary tab to modify the boundary:
Click the Apply button to view the effect of changes made without closing this window.
Boundary Options
When setting the Boundary, you can set a rectangular boundary defined by the From rectangle settings. You
can use the extents of any other object in the project by selecting from the Enclose Object list, but the grid
boundary will always be a rectangle.
To define a non-rectangular boundary, use the From another object options and select from the list of objects
available in the project. This is useful if, for example, you wish to define a grid using the boundary of a
geological model.
The Simplify boundary option reduces the number of points along the boundary. Reducing the Tolerance
value increases the number of points along the boundary. The two settings together let you define a basic
boundary with elements that are roughly uniform in size, set by the value of Element size. Here, a grid has
been created from a geological model with the Simplify boundary option enabled:
Disabling the Simplify boundary option results in more detail around the edges of the grid:
Element Size Settings

The Element size setting determines the basic size of the triangles that make up the grid, although the size will
vary according to features applied to the grid and the Feature vertex snapping distance. The size will also
vary if the Simplify boundary option is unticked, in which case the Element size setting is the maximum size
of the triangles.
The Feature vertex snapping distance is automatically set to 1 percent of the Element size. To use a
smaller snapping distance, untick the Auto box and set the value required. You cannot set a value that is larger
than 1 percent of the Element size.
The effects of the Feature vertex snapping distance do not become apparent until features have been added
to the grid.
Adding Features to the Grid | 315
Adding Features to the Grid

To add features to the grid, right-click on the grid in the project tree and select New Feature. The New
FEFLOWFeature window will appear:
You can add Point, Line and Polygon features, and the Feature Object list will display all suitable objects
available in the project. Ticking the Simplify Feature option will reduce the number of points used.
Click OK to add the feature, which will appear in the project tree under the FEFLOW grid object:
You can edit the feature by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and selecting Open. However, the feature
has not yet been applied to the grid. To enable the feature, double-click on the grid to open the Edit 2D
FEFLOW Grid window. Tick the box to enable the feature, then adjust the number of Refinement Steps:
More Refinement Steps will produce more detail near the feature.
Click Apply or OK to view the effect the feature and its settings have on the grid.
If you want to modify a feature without having to reprocess the grid, untick it in the Features tab. If you want to
delete a feature, right-click on it in the project tree and select Delete.
The images below show a grid displayed with collar points (in purple) to demonstrate the effects of no features
and collars applied with different refinement steps:
No features
Collars with 2 refinement steps
Collars with 10 refinement steps
To view all features added to a grid, right-click on the grid and select View Snapped Features. A Snapped
Features object will appear in the shape list that represents all objects used to add features to the grid:
Here, four snapped objects appear in the scene: the three features listed in the Features tab and the grids
boundary.
See Creating a 3D FEFLOW Model for information on using the 2D grid as the basis for a 3D model.

Creating a 3D FEFLOW Model | 317
To create a new 3D FEFLOW model, you must first create or import a 2D FEFLOW grid as described in
Creating a 2D FEFLOW Model and Importing a FEFLOW Grid.
Once you have created or imported a 2D FEFLOWgrid, right-click on the Hydrogeology folder and select
New FEFLOWModel. The Extrude 3D FEFLOW Grid window will appear:
The dimensions and resolution of the grid are set by the 2D or 3D grid selected from the FEFLOWGrid list.
See Creating a 2D FEFLOW Model for information on creating and refining a 2D grid that can be used as the
basis for a 3D grid.
The Gridding from setting determines the geological model used for layer guides. Ticking the Evaluate
Gridded Model box will evaluate the new 3D model against the selected geological model and set it as the
evaluation for export. See Evaluating FEFLOW Models for more information. If you do not wish to evaluate the
geological model on the grid, untick the box. You will still be able to use the layers in the geological model to
control the grid layers.
The FEFLOW grid is initially made up of two layers equally spaced between the topography and the geological
model, with the minimum thickness of each layer determined by the Minimum Thickness setting. You can add
layers to the grid by clicking on the Select Layer Guides button and then selecting from the layers available in
the geological model:
If the grid is required to follow a geological model lithology contact surface, move the layer into the Selected
list and it will be honoured in the gridding process.
Click OK to return to the Extrude 3D FEFLOW Grid window. The selected layers will be displayed:
Click OK to generate the new FEFLOW grid, which will appear in the project tree under the Hydrogeology
folder.
Once the model has been created, you can edit it by expanding the model in the project tree and double-clicking
on its grid object. The layer guides selected, the number defined and the Minimum Thickness can be modified,
but the FEFLOW grid on which the model is based and the geological model used for gridding cannot be
changed.
The boundaries of the selected geological model must be larger than the FEFLOWgrid used as the basis for
the new model. If this is not the case, you can change the geological models extents so that they enclose
the FEFLOW grid.
For further information on working with the new grid, see:
l

When a 3D FEFLOW model is exported, the evaluated geological model is used to assign lithologies to the
blocks in the grid. If the grid has not been evaluated against a geological model, you must do so before you can
edit the material types and before you can export the grid.
To evaluate a FEFLOW grid, expand the model in the project tree. Right-click on the grid object ( ) and select
Evaluations. Although you can evaluate an interpolant or distance function, they cannot be exported with the
grid and are simply used for displaying the grid in Leapfrog Geo.
Assigning an Evaluation for Export | 319
selected one or more objects, click OK. You will then be able to select the evaluations from the view list, as
described in Evaluating Objects.

For 3D grids created in Leapfrog Geo, the evaluation used when creating the grid will automatically be assigned
as the evaluation for export. A material types table ( ) will appear in the project tree as part of the 3D grid.
If the grid was imported into Leapfrog Geo or created without being evaluated against a geological model, you
will need to manually set the evaluation for export. To do this:
l
Evaluate the grid against one or more geological models, as described above.
Right-click on the model ( or ) in the project tree and select Set Evaluation for Export. The Select
Evaluation window will appear showing all geological models evaluated on the grid. Select the required
evaluation and click OK.
A material types table will be added to the FEFLOW grid in the project tree. Edit material types by doubleclicking on the table. See Setting Material Types for a FEFLOW Model.

You can combine geological models and set the priority used for evaluation. This is useful when you have
geological models available that describe different parts of the area of interest or if you have a refined
geological model for part of the model. To combine geological models for evaluation, select the required models
in the Select Models To Evaluate window, then click on the Combined Evaluation button.
In this example, there are three geological models selected:
The GM and GM from contacts models describe similar areas, but GM has more detail. The GM larger model
describes a larger area but with less detail. Tick the models to combine them and set their priority. Click OK to
create the combined evaluation, then click OK in the Select Models To Evaluate window. The combined
evaluation will be available from the view list.
The scene below shows an evaluation of these three geological models on a FEFLOWgrid, where each model
has been set to a single colour to show how the information from each model is combined:
The blue model has the highest priority and is used wherever there is information available. The green model
has the lowest priority and is used when there is no information from higher priority models.
This scene shows how the grid changes when the priority of the models is changed:
In this case, the purple model is now higher priority than the blue model and is used in preference to the blue
model. The green model remains the lowest priority model.
A combined evaluation can be selected as the evaluation for export.
window.

When a FEFLOW model is first evaluated against a geological model, a material types table ( ) is added to the
FEFLOW grid in the project tree. You can edit material types by double-clicking on the table. You can also open
the table by right-clicking on the grid and selecting Edit Material Types.
If the grid has been imported into Leapfrog Geo and has not yet been evaluated against a geological model, you
will be prompted to do so. Expand the model in the project tree, right-click on the grid object and select
Evaluate Geological Model. See Evaluating FEFLOW Models for more information.
Exporting a FEFLOW Model | 321
In the Edit Material Types window, click in a cell to edit a property:
Material properties are assigned to FEFLOW blocks based on the position of the blocks centroid relative to the
geological model used to evaluate the grid. The position of the centroid is calculated and Leapfrog Geo then
determines which lithology the centroid falls inside. The K values for the assigned lithology are assigned to the
entire block; there is no averaging.
If more than one object has been evaluated on the grid, you can set material types separately for each
evaluation. Select the required evaluation from the Evaluation dropdown list:
However, the only material type information that will be exported is that set for the evaluation to be exported.

To export a 3D FEFLOW model as an ASCII format FEFLOW file (*.fem), right-click on the grid in the project
tree and select Export To FEFLOW. You will be prompted to choose a File name and location. Select the
options required, then click Save.
2D FEFLOW grids cannot be exported.
Importing and Creating Block Models

The Block Models folder can be used to import Isatis block models and evaluate them against geological
models and interpolants. You can also create block models, which can then be exported for use in other
applications. Creating block models within Leapfrog Geo has the advantage that the resolution can easily be
changed.
Importing a Block Model

Leapfrog Geo imports block models in the following formats:
l
CSV + Text header (*.csv, *.csv.txt)
CSV with embedded header (*.csv)
Isatis Block Model files (*.asc)
Importing an Isatis Block Model

To import an Isatis format block model, right-click on the Block Models folder and select Import Block Model.
Select the file you wish to import and click Open. The model will be imported and added to the Block Models
folder.
Importing a Block Model in CSV Format

Block models imported in CSV format must be regular, rotated only about the Z axis. You will also need to map
the data in the file to the block model format Leapfrog Geo expects.
To import a block model in CSV format, right-click on the Block Models folder and select Import Block Model.
Select the file you wish to import and click Open. An import window will be displayed in which you can map the
columns in the file to those Leapfrog Geo expects. Once you have mapped the required columns, click Next to
define the grid.
In the next window, the data in the file is displayed and you can select the values to use in formatting the grid:
You can select information in the file and drag it to the corresponding values on the lefthand side:
You can also enter the grid definition values manually.
Exporting a Block Model | 325
Once all required values have been copied, Leapfrog Geo will check the grid definition against the data in the
file and confirm that the centroids match:
Click Finish. The block model will appear in the Block Models folder.
Exporting a Block Model

There are two options for exporting a block model created in Leapfrog Geo: exporting the model in one of the
supported formats or exporting the model as points.
Exporting a Block Model in a Supported Format

Block models created in Leapfrog Geo can be exported in the following formats:
l
CSV + Text header (*.csv, *.csv.txt)
CSV with embedded header (*.csv)
Isatis Block Model files (*.asc)
Surpac Block Model files (*.mdl)
All evaluations on the block model will be exported as part of the file.
To export a block model in one of the supported formats, right-click on the block model in the project tree and
select Export Block Model. You will be prompted to select the file format. Enter a name and location for the file
and click Save.
Exporting a Block Model as Points

Block models can also be exported as points in CSV format, which does not include the block sizes and model
description. To do this, right-click on the block model and select Export as Points. Next, enter a name and
location for the file and click Save. You will then be prompted to select the CSV encoding.
Creating a Block Model

To create a new block model, right-click on the Block Models folder and select New Block Model. The New
Block Model window will appear, together with a set of controls that will help you set the size, location and
orientation of the model in the scene:
Use the controls in the scene to adjust the model size and extents or enter the information in the New Block
Model window. You can set the extents from any object in the project by selecting that object from the
Enclose Object list.
Set the Reference centroid by entering the coordinates in the New Block Model window or you can click on
the select button ( ), then on an object in the scene.
The Round Out option rounds out the Base point coordinates and the Boundary size to a whole number of
blocks.
When you first create a block model, choose larger values for the Block size as processing time for large
models can be considerable. Once you have created a block model, you can change its properties to
provide more detail, if required.
Creating a Block Model | 327
You can also evaluate the block model against geological models, interpolants and distance functions in the
project. To do this, click on the Evaluations tab. All objects available in the project will be displayed. Move the
models you wish to use into the Selected list.
Enter a Name for the block model and click OK. The model will appear under the Block Models folder. You can
make changes to it by double-clicking on it.
Sharing Geochemical Data with ioGAS

With the Geochemistry folder, you can connect to ioGAS and analyse geochemical data. Data in ioGAS can
be visualised in Leapfrog Geo and new lithology columns can be created. Data can also be sent to ioGAS for
analysis, then visualised in Leapfrog Geo.
The Geochemistry folder and related features are only available as part of the Geochemistry module.
Contact Customer Support as described in Getting Support for more information about licensing this
module.
To connect to ioGAS, make sure ioGAS is running. Next, right-click on the ioGAS object in the project tree and
select Connect:
Once the connection is established, any dataset open in ioGAS will be available from the ioGAS object:
The status of the connection to ioGAS is indicated for the ioGAS object, and data in ioGAS appears in the
Geochemistry folder.
You can view the data in the scene by adding the ioGAS data object to the scene. When attributes are changed
in ioGAS, the display will be updated in Leapfrog Geo. You can also:
l
Import the ioGAS data into Leapfrog Geo. See Importing ioGAS Data as Points.
Send lithology data to ioGAS. See Sending Lithology Data to ioGAS.
To terminate the connection to ioGAS, right-click on the ioGAS object and select Disconnect. Once the
connection to ioGAS is terminated, ioGAS data will no longer be available in Leapfrog Geo.
Sending Lithology Data to ioGAS

This feature is only available as part of the Geochemistry module. See Sharing Geochemical Data with
ioGAS for more information.
To send lithology data to ioGAS, you must first create a lithology column from the drillhole data in the project.
To do this, right-click on the ioGAS object and select Select Columns To Link:
In the window that appears, select the table you wish to use for the Base table, then select the columns to
send to ioGAS:
Enter a Name for the lithology and click Create. The new lithology will appear as part of the ioGAS folder. The
data is now ready to be sent to ioGAS.
Opening the Data in ioGAS

Ensure that Leapfrog Geo is connected to ioGAS.
In ioGAS, select File > Open Link Data. If more than one lithology is available, a message will appear
prompting you to choose which lithology to open.
Once the lithology has been opened, you can use the tools available in ioGAS to analyse the data. If you have
the data visible in the Leapfrog Geo scene, changes made will be displayed in Leapfrog Geo.
Sending a New Data Column Back to Leapfrog Geo

To save the changes and send a new data column back to Leapfrog Geo, select one of the Make Variable
From options from the Data menu in ioGAS.
The column will be added to the base interval table used to create the new lithology.
When the connection to ioGAS is terminated, the lithology object will remain in the project tree as part of the
ioGAS folder. Data columns created in ioGAS will also be available and will appear in the base interval
Importing ioGAS Data as Points | 331
table.
Importing ioGAS Data as Points

This feature is only available as part of the Geochemistry module. See Sharing Geochemical Data with
ioGAS for more information.
When Leapfrog Geo is connected to ioGAS and a dataset is open in ioGAS, you can import the ioGAS data as
points. To do this, right-click on the ioGAS data object in the project tree and select Import as Points:
In the window that appears, select the data columns you wish to import and how they will be imported:
Click Finish to import the data, which will appear in the Points folder. You can then display the points in the
scene and work with them as you would any other points object. The new points object will remain in Leapfrog
Geo once the connection to ioGAS is terminated.
Planning Drillholes
In Leapfrog Geo, you can plan drillholes, view prognoses for models in the project and export planned drillholes
in .csv format. Leapfrog Geo can also import planned drillholes.
Planned drillholes are added to a project from the Planned Drillholes folder, which is in the Drillhole Data
folder. When displayed in the scene, the planned drillhole is made up of a collar point, a target location and a
path defined by lift and drift parameters:
You can change the default settings used for defining planned drillholes in the Drillhole Planning Options
window. See Drillhole Planning Options.
Adding Planned Drillholes

To plan a drillhole, first add the data objects to the scene that you will use in helping to define the drillhole, such
as the topography and any existing drillholes. Next, right click on the Planned Drillholes folder and select
Plan Drillhole. In the window that appears, you can define the drillhole by specifying its collar or its target:
You can change whether Collar or Target is selected when this window is opened by clicking on the
Defaults button. See Drillhole Planning Options.
A name is automatically generated for the new planned drillhole based on the drillhole IDs in the collar table. If
there is more than one phase available, you can select a different phase from the dropdown list.
There are three ways to define the drillhole collar or target:
l
Click in the scene to set the collar or target location. First, click on the Select button ( ) for the Collar or
Target, then click in the scene to define the Collar or Target. The drillhole will appear in the scene and
you can adjust the coordinates using the controls in the Drillhole Planning window. Click the Slice
along drillhole button to draw a slice in the scene. This is useful in adjusting the drillhole path and in
defining subsequent drillholes.
Draw the drillhole in the scene. Click on the Select button ( ) for the Collar or Target, then click and
drag in the scene to define a basic path for the drillhole. If you are defining the drillhole from the collar
down, click first on or near the topography. Likewise, if you are defining the drillhole from the target up,
click first at or near the target point.
Enter the coordinates for the Collar or the Target in the Drillhole Planning window.
Clicking the Move collar onto the Topography button adjusts the elevation of the drillhole so that it lies on the
topography.
Click the Next Hole button to create another planned drillhole. The new planned drillhole will be created at a
specific distance from the currently displayed planned drillhole using the Path settings for the currently
displayed drillhole. The distance is determined by the Offset To Next Hole settings in the Drillhole Planning
Options window. See Drillhole Planning Options.
Once you have specified the collar or target, adjust the drillhole path:
l
Lift is how much the drillhole deviates upward.
Drift is how much the drillhole deviates laterally.
Leapfrog Geo automatically calculates the Depth value when the drillhole is defined by the Target
location.
Adding an End of hole length extends the drillhole past the Target location.
Planned drillholes will appear in the Planned Drillholes folder. You can change a planned drillhole by rightclicking on it and select Edit Drillhole.
Drillhole Planning Options | 335
Drillhole Planning Options

When planning drillholes using the Drillhole Planning window, the Path values entered apply only to the
current drillhole. If you wish to set default values for these parameters for new planned drillholes, either rightclick on the Planned Drillholes folder and select Edit Planned Drillholes Defaults or click on the Defaults
button in the Drillhole Planning window. The Drillhole Planning Options window will appear:
Select whether new planned drillholes are specified by the Collar or by the Target.
In the Drillhole Planning window, clicking Next adds a new planned drillhole. In the Drillhole Planning
Options window, the Offset To Next Hole values determine how far the new planned drillhole is from the
selected planned drillhole.
Enter the information required and click OK. The new settings will be applied to the next new planned drillhole
added to the project.
Viewing Drilling Prognoses

Planned drillholes can be evaluated against any model in the project. To view drilling prognoses for a drillhole,
right-click on it and select Drilling Prognoses. The Drilling Prognoses window will appear:
You can display prognoses for different models by selecting them from the dropdown list. For interpolants, you
can view a plot of the data by clicking on the Plot tab.
In each tab, you can copy the information displayed to your computers clipboard by clicking the Copy button.
The information in the Data tab will be copied as tab delimited text, which can be copied into a spreadsheet
application such as Excel. The plot displayed in the Plot tab will be copied as a bitmap image.
Exporting Planned Drillholes

To export planned drillholes, either right-click on the Planned Drillholes object and select Export Planned
Drillholes or right-click on a planned drillhole and select Export. The Export Planned Drillholes window will
appear:
Importing Planned Drillholes | 337
Selecting a phase from the Show Phase list will select all planned drillholes in that phase.
The total length will be updated as you add or remove drillholes.
In Leapfrog Geo, positive dip points down for planned drillholes. To invert the dip for exported planned drillholes
so that negative dip points down, tick the box for Invert dip on export.
Click Export. You will be prompted for a filename and location.
Importing Planned Drillholes

Leapfrog Geo imports planned drillholes from files in CSV format. The columns expected are:
l
X-Y-Z coordinates for the planned drillhole
Azimuth
Dip
Lift rate
Drift rate
Distance
Extension
Target Depth
Comment
To import planned drillholes, right-click on the Planned Drillholes folder and select Import Planned
Drillholes. If the drillhole IDs in the file are already in the project, you will be prompted to resolve the conflict:
You can:
l
Rename the imported drillholes. Leapfrog Geo will automatically assign new names and import the
planned drillholes.
Exclude planned drillholes that already exist in the project. Planned drillholes will only be imported if they
have an identifier that does not already exist in the project.
Replace existing planned drillholes with the imported drillholes. Use this option if you are importing
information previously exported from the project and subsequently updated in an external application.
Click OK to process the file.

If there are no conflicts, the planned drillholes will be imported and added to the Planned Drillholes folder.
Displaying and Presenting Data

Leapfrog Geo has a number of tools for displaying and presenting data for use in reports and presentations. You
can:
l
Create and export cross sections, fence sections and serial sections
Create and export contours
Render and save images for use outside of Leapfrog Geo
Save scenes that demonstrate different aspects of the model and the model-building process. These
scenes can then be saved as a movie or as a scene file that can be opened in Leapfrog Viewer.
Creating and Working with Sections

There are three types of sections in Leapfrog Geo:
l
A typical cross section is a vertical plane with an image or geologic cross section applied to it. In Leapfrog
Geo, this type of cross section can be created directly in the scene, from the slicer or from an imported
image.
A fence section deviates. In Leapfrog Geo, a fence section can be created from a polyline drawn in the
scene or from any line object in the project.
A serial section is a series of typical cross sections taken at an offset from a single base section.
Cross sections, fence sections and serial sections can be evaluated against geological models, interpolants
and distance functions in the project, as described in Evaluating Objects. Cross sections and fence sections
can also be evaluated against surfaces. Objects a section is evaluated on can be included when the section is
exported.
There are two options available for exporting sections:
l
The first option is to export the section as a DXF file (*.dxf). This option exports a series of DXF lines
created from the intersection of the evaluation volumes and the section plane. The lines generated from
each volume are saved as separate layers in the file. Right-click on the section in the project tree and
select Export. You will be prompted to select an evaluation to export with the section. Enter a filename
and location, then click Save.
The second option for exporting a section is to create a section layout and then export it as a PDF file
(*.pdf), Scalable Vector Graphics file (*.svg) or PNG image (*.png). This option is more flexible than
exporting the section as a DXF file as you have more control over the section layout. You can customise
the page layout and include multiple evaluations and annotations. For typical cross sections and serial
sections, you can also display drillholes and planned drillholes. See Creating Section Layouts for more
information.
Creating a Cross Section in the Scene | 341
Creating a Cross Section in the Scene

To create a cross section in the scene, add a model to the scene. Next, right-click on the Cross Sections and
Contours folder and select New Cross Section. The New Cross Section window will appear, together with a
section plane and controls in the scene that let you adjust the position of the section plane:
The front (F) and back (B) of the section plane is indicated in the scene. To swap the front and back, click the
Swap Front button ( ).
Use the handles in the scene to position the section plane. The handles work in the same manner as the
moving plane controls, as described in Using the Moving Plane.
Two buttons in the New Cross Section window let you create a cross section that is aligned north-to-south ( )
or east-to-west ( ):
The other two buttons are active when the slicer is in the scene. Clicking the Set section to slicer button ( )
creates a cross section from the position of the slicer in the scene. If you then click the Lock section to slicer
button ( ), moving the position of the slicer will update the position of the cross section in the New Cross
Section window.
If the slicer is already in the scene when you select New Cross Section, the position of the slicer will be
used to define the initial orientation of the section. This is an effective way of creating a section from the
slicer: add the model to the scene, draw a slice and then create a cross section.
Once the section plane is positioned as required, click OK to create the new cross section, which will appear in
the Cross Sections and Contours folder. Display it by clearing the scene, then adding the cross section to
the scene.
Cross sections can be evaluated against geological models, interpolants, distance functions and surfaces in
the project, as described in Evaluating Objects. Objects a cross section or fence section is evaluated on can
be included when the section is exported.
Creating a Cross Section from an Image

To create a new cross section from an image, the image must first be imported. Right-click on the Cross
Sections and Contours folder and select New Cross Section From Image. You will be prompted to select
an image.
Next, the Import Image window will be displayed:
Cropping the image to only the area of interest will reduce video RAM usage and may improve graphics
performance. To crop the image, click on the Crop Image button ( ), then drag around the part of the image
you wish to use. Click on the Remove Crop button ( ) to clear the cropping.
If the image contains georeference data, it will automatically be added to the map and displayed. You can edit
the imported georeference data by ticking the Override images georeference data box, then editing the
information.
If the image does not contain georeference information, you will need to add it manually by adding reference
markers, as described in Importing Maps and Images. For an image marked as a Vertical Section, only two
reference points are required.
Add the markers to the image and enter the coordinates. Selecting either East Facing Section or North
Facing Section constrains the points. For example, for an east-facing image, you will only need to enter the
East (X) coordinates once.
Creating a Fence Section | 343
Once you have set the coordinates for each marker, click OK. The new cross section will be created and added
to the Cross Sections and Contours folder. Display it by dragging it into the scene or by right-clicking on the
cross section and selecting View Object. The cross section will appear in the scene.
Once you have georeferenced an image, you can export it as a GeoTIFF. To do this, right-click on it in the
project tree and select Export. You will be prompted for a filename and location. Click Save.
Once you have created a cross section, you can edit it or use it to evaluate geological models, interpolants,
distance functions and surfaces. See Evaluating Objects.
Creating a Fence Section

You can draw a polyline or use any existing line object in the project to create a cross section that deviates. To
do this, right-click on the Cross Sections and Contours folder and select New Fence Section. The New
Fence Section window will be displayed:
You can draw the polyline in the scene directly by selecting the New Polyline option. You can also use any
polyline in the project by selecting the Existing Polyline option.
Only GIS lines, polylines imported into Leapfrog Geo or polylines created using the straight line drawing tool
can be used to create fence sections.
Click OK to create the fence section. If you chose to create a New Polyline, the drawing controls will appear in
the scene and you can begin drawing, as described in Drawing With the Straight Line Tool.
The fence section will appear under the Cross Sections and Contours folder and you can edit it by doubleclicking on it. You can also use it to evaluate geological models, interpolants, distance functions and surfaces,
as described in Evaluating Objects.
If you create a section layout for a fence section, you can include multiple evaluations and annotations on
the section layout, but you cannot include drillholes and planned drillholes. See Creating Section Layouts.
Creating a Serial Section

A serial section is a series of cross sections taken at an offset from a single base section. To create a serial
section, add a model to the scene. Next, right-click on the Cross Sections and Contours folder and select
New Serial Section. The New Serial Section window will appear and planes representing the base section
and the offset sections will be added to the scene:
Setting the Base Section

The handles in the scene control the position of the base section and work in the same manner as the moving
plane controls (see Using the Moving Plane).
The front (F) and back (B) of the base section plane is indicated in the scene. To swap the front and back, click
the Swap Front button ( ).
Two buttons in the New Serial Section window let you create a base section that is aligned north-to-south ( )
or east-to-west ( ). The other two buttons are active when the slicer is in the scene. Clicking the Set section
to slicer button ( ) creates the base section from the position of the slicer in the scene. If you then click the
Lock section to slicer button ( ), moving the position of the slicer will update the position of the base section
in the New Serial Section window.
If the slicer is already in the scene when you select New Serial Section, the position of the slicer will be
used to define the initial orientation of the base section.
Setting the Offset Sections | 345
Setting the Offset Sections

The number of offset sections is determined by the value of the Spacing setting and the Front and Back
Extents:
You can change the number of offset sections by:

l
Changing the Spacing setting. The number of offset sections will be recalculated and updated in the
scene.
Changing the Front or Back settings. For example, increasing the Front setting adds an offset section on
the front of the base section, increasing the extents by the value of Spacing.
Changing the object used to define the extents. Select an object from the Enclose Object list. The base
section will be moved to the centre of the selected object.
Creating the Serial Section

Click OK to create the section. In the project tree, the serial section includes the individual cross sections:
The serial section can be evaluated against geological models, interpolants, distance functions and surfaces in
the project, as described in Evaluating Objects.
Displaying a Serial Section

When you display a serial section in the scene, you can add the slicer to the scene and use it to move easily
between the sections in the stack. To do this, click on the slicer in the shape list, then select the base section
from the Set to list:
Next, set the Step size to the Spacing setting used to create the section. You can then use the < and > keys
to view each individual cross section.
Exporting a Serial Section

The options for exporting serial sections differ for the section itself and the offset sections:
l
A serial section cannot be used to create a section layout. When exported as a DXF file, the serial section
will be exported in a single file with a collection of DXF lines based on intersections between the selected
evaluation and the section planes.
The offset sections that make up a serial section can be exported in both ways.
See Creating Section Layouts and Exporting a Cross Section.
Creating Section Layouts | 347
Creating Section Layouts

With the Section Layout Editor, you can create a section layout for an existing section and then export the
section. You can customise the section layout by:
l
Adding models and surfaces the section has been evaluated against
Adding drillholes and planned drillholes
Changing the page size, orientation and margins
Adding titles, a scale bar, legends, annotations and images, such as a standard form or logo
The appearance of all objects can be customised without changing how objects from the project tree are
displayed in the scene.
Multiple evaluations can be displayed on the section. For example, here a geological model, an interpolant and
multiple drillholes are displayed on the section:
Formats the section layout can be exported in are:

l
PDF file (*.pdf)
Scalable Vector Graphics file (*.svg)
PNG image (*.png)
Section Layout Checklist

Once you have created a section but before you start creating the section layout, take the following steps.
1. Check the sections extents and orientation.
The initial dimensions of the section on the page are determined by the size of the section plane, and its
orientation on the page is determined by the front (F) and back (B) faces of the section plane. Here, the
front and back faces of the section have been swapped, which results in the section displayed on the page
being flipped:
2. Check that the section has been evaluated against objects you wish to display on the page.
To do this, right-click on the section in the project tree and select Evaluations or Evaluate Surface.
3. Add planned drillholes to the project.
Planned drillholes can be displayed on the section, but these must be defined before you start the process
of laying out the section.
Creating a New Section Layout | 349
Creating a New Section Layout

To create a new section layout, right-click on an existing section in the project tree and select New Section
Layout. The New Section Layout window will appear, together with the Section Layout Editor:
The settings in the New Section Layout window determine the basic section layout:
l
The Scale settings determine the scale used to display the section on the page. As you change the scale
settings, the layout of the section on the page will be updated in the preview. If you want a specific page
size, select Fit to Page to set a scale that best fits the page width. You will be able to change the page
margins once you have closed the New Section Layout window.
The Page Properties settings determine the page size and orientation. If you wish to use a specific
Scale, select the Orientation required, then click Fit to Section to choose the best page size.
For Evaluations, select from the models and surfaces the section has been evaluated against. When you
select a model or surface, it will be added to the preview. This is a useful way of seeing what objects you
wish to include on the section. Note that when you add a model to the page, a legend for the model is also
added.
For Extents, choose whether to use the Section Extents or Evaluation Extents. If you wish to use the
extents from a model evaluation, select only that model. Further models can be added to the page once
the layout has been created.
All settings in the New Section Layout window can be changed once the layout has been created.
Changing how objects are displayed on the section page does not change those objects in the project.
As you add objects to the section, the preview in the Section Layout Editor window will be updated.
Click OKto close the New Section Layout window. You can then make further changes to the page layout in
the Section Layout Editor. See Using the Section Layout Editor.
Using the Section Layout Editor

In Section Layout Editor, the Layout Tree shows the different layers that can be added to the page. The
different parts of the Layout Tree as they relate to the page preview are shown below:
For more information about working with the different parts of the section layout, see:
l
Setting Up the Page
Using the Section Layout Editor | 351
Click on an object in the page preview to move or resize it. This will also select the object in the Layout Tree
and you can see what properties can be changed. For example, in the preview, click on the Title to view its
styling options:
The Section object controls all the models and surfaces displayed on the section:
Models and surfaces selected in the New Section Layout window are automatically added to the page
preview:
Further objects can be added by right-clicking on Models, Drillholes or Surfaces.

Entries have also been made for models and surfaces in the Legend Group:
Object Names and Colours | 353
Object Names and Colours

The names and colours of objects in the layout are linked to their parent objects in the project tree. You can
override them by selecting the object in the Layout Tree, then ticking the Edit box:
If Edit is disabled for an objects text or colour and changes are made to the parent object while the Section
Layout Editor window is open, the changes will not be reflected in the section layout until it is next opened.
If Edit is enabled for an objects text or colour, then that property will not change when the parent objects
colour or title are changed.
Styling Layout Objects
All layout objects are styled by clicking on them in the Layout Tree, then adjusting their appearance in the
properties panel.
Text displayed in the section layout is controlled by a style sheet that can be accessed whenever you are
editing a text object. For example, clicking on Edit Styles for the Title opens the list of Text Styles with the
Title selected, but also allows you to change the appearance of styles used for other text objects visible in the
preview:
Line, border and swatch properties are also changed in the properties panel. Swatches for output volumes can
be displayed using a hatched fill, which is enabled by clicking on the output volume in the project tree, then
changing its properties:
Styling Layout Objects | 355
The styling of objects in the Layout Tree controls how they appear in their associated legend. The Legend
Group object controls the position and size of the legend, but not the colour, line style and fill used to
display each object. For example, the appearance of the volume <0.5 in the interpolant is controlled from
the Models object (left):
Whether or not the legend is visible on the page and how it is displayed is controlled from the Legend
Group object (right).
When a model or other object is added to the section, a legend for that object is added to the Legend
Group.
Some objects, such as models, drillholes and surfaces, occupy the same space on the page. These objects
can be organised into layers, and opacity settings changed to emphasise relevant information. To change the
order of objects on the page, right-click on them and select how you wish to organise the layers:
To change the opacity of an object, click on it, then adjust the objects Opacity using the slider:
Setting Up the Page

Page Properties are set in the New Section Layout window, but these can be changed in the Layout Tree.
Click on the Page object to change the Page Size, Orientation and Margins:
If you wish to use a specific Scale, select the Orientation required, then click Fit to Section to choose the
best page size.
The Section object controls the appearance of the section and the objects in the project that are displayed on
the section. The properties for the Section object itself control the size of the section on the page and how the
axes are displayed. Any changes made in these tabs are displayed in the preview so you can experiment with
these settings.
l
The Section tab includes the Scale settings from the New Section Layout window.
The Extents tab includes the settings from the New Section Layout window and additional options for
displaying Additional sky and end point labels.
Adding and Styling Models | 357
The settings in the X-Axis and Y-Axis tabs determine how the axes are displayed. By default, the axes
are displayed only on the lefthand side and along the bottom of the section. To display axes along the
righthand side and above the section, tick the Secondary option.
The other objects that are part of the Section object are used to add models and surfaces that are displayed on
the section and to customise how they are displayed. For cross sections and serial sections, you can also add
drillholes and planned drillholes.
Changing how objects are displayed on the section layout does not change those objects in the project.
Adding and Styling Models

If you selected models and surfaces in the New Section Layout window, these are automatically added to the
Models and Surfaces objects in the Layout Tree. To add more models, right-click on the Models object and
select Add Model. The models the section has been evaluated on will be listed. Select those required and click
OK. The new models will be added to the Models object and legend items added to the Legend Group.
If you selected a geological model with a fault system, the faults will automatically be added to the section and
to the Legend Group. Change a fault systems properties by expanding the geological model in the Layout
Tree and clicking on the Fault System and its faults.
When you display multiple models on the section:
l
Use the Opacity setting for each model to expose and emphasise information.
Right-click on the models to move them up or down in the layer hierarchy.
Expand each model in the Layout Tree to change the Fill and Hatch for each output volume to make
some volumes more apparent.
Hide some of the Output Volumes.
A single line style is used to display a models output volumes. There is, however, a Highlight option that can
be enabled to make a volume of interest stand out from the other volumes:
The Opacity setting for each output volume in a model is inherited from the model as a whole. You cannot
change the Opacity on a volume-by-volume basis; however, you can hide individual volumes.
For geological models with a fault system, the fault system does not inherit its Opacity setting from the
parent model.
Adding and Styling Drillholes and Planned Drillholes

Drillholes and planned drillholes can be added to section layout for cross sections and serial sections, but
not for fence sections.
Drillholes and planned drillholes can be added to the cross section. To do this, right-click on the Drillholes
object and select either Add Drillholes or Add Planned Drillholes.
For adding drillholes, you will be prompted to select the interval table to display.
Adding and Styling Drillholes and Planned Drillholes | 359
For both drillholes and planned drillholes, you can filter the drillholes based on a minimum distance from the
section plane:
This is the minimum distance to any point on each drillhole trace.

If you tick the Clip geometry to filter distance option, only parts of the drillhole within the filter distance will
be included in the section layout.
Select the required drillholes and click OK.
When displaying drillholes, you can display up to display up to three columns of data. This is controlled by the
Colourings settings in the Lines tab:
Adding and Styling Surfaces | 361
Click the Options button for a column to filter values or display data on the drillholes:
Adding and Styling Surfaces

To add a surface to the section, right-click on the Surfaces object and select Add Surface. The surfaces the
section has been evaluated on will be listed. Select those required and click OK.
The options for styling surfaces are the same as for lines. A surface can be displayed in the legend, if required.

The Legend Group controls how the legend is displayed on the page.
When you add a model, surface or drillhole object to the section, a legend for that object will be added to the
Legend Group. For example, here, legends have been added for an interpolant, the surfaces and drillhole data
objects:
Note that:
l
The Surfaces that appear on the section have been added to a single legend.
Because the drillholes displayed on the section use Left and Centre Colourings, a legend has been
added for each.
Changing the Legend Group Layout | 363
Changing the Legend Group Layout

Select the Legend Group itself to change its layout. These settings apply to the Legend Group as a whole.
Columns can be laid out vertically or horizontally:
You can also change the swatch size and gradient and add a Boundary box.
For each individual legend, you can change the number of Rows used to display the values
The order in which legends appear in the Legend Group is the order in which they appear in the Layout Tree.
To change the order in which the legends appear, right-click on them and select a Move option.
Use the Legend Group Layout > Columns setting and the Rows setting for each individual legend to make
the best use of the space available on the page.
Styling Legend Swatches

The colours, line widths, fills and hatches displayed in the Legend Group are controlled by the objects
themselves. For example, to change how the < 0.5 shell is displayed for the interpolant, click on the output
volume, under the Models object:
Making Legends Visible and Invisible

If you do not wish to include a legend in the Legend Group, click on it in the Legend Group and untick
Visible:
This does not change whether or not the object itself is visible, it simply excludes it from the Legend Group.
Adding and Organising Annotations | 365

Once you have laid out the main Section object and organised the Legend Group, you can add a number of
different types of annotation to the layout.
Title
The Title object formats the title displayed on the page. To move the title, click on it in the layout preview. The
text used for the Title is the name for the section in the project tree, but this can be changed in the properties
panel.
Title Block
The Title Block object adds a title block based on ISO 7200:
To display the Title Block on the section, select it in the Layout Tree, then tick the Visible box.
Scale Bar
The Scale Bar object controls the size and format of the scale bar. Its position is controlled by moving it in the
preview.
Location
The Location object controls how location information is displayed.
Text Boxes
With the Text Boxes object, you can add text boxes and arrows to highlight information and details on the
section:
Arrows are connected to text boxes, and so initially only text boxes can be added. Right-click on a text box to
add an arrow to it. When the Automatic anchoring option is enabled for an arrow, the arrows anchor will move
when its associated text box is moved. If this option is disabled, the arrow will move when you move the text
box, but you will have to place its anchor manually.
Images
If you wish to import an image such as a logo or map, right-click on the Images object and select Add Image.
Navigate to the folder that contains the image file and select the file. Click Open to import the file, which will
automatically be added to the section layout.
Exporting the Section Layout

Once you have finished adjusting the section layout, you can export it in one of the following formats:
l
PDF file (*.pdf)
Scalable Vector Graphics file (*.svg)
PNG image (*.png)
Copying a Section Layout | 367
Click the Export button ( ) to export the section:
You will be prompted for a filename and location.
Copying a Section Layout

If you have already created a section layout and wish to reuse it for other sections, you can copy it to other
sections.
Copying a section layout copies the evaluations used in the original section layout, together with the page size
and orientation and the position of the Layout Tree objects on the page. How models, surfaces and drillholes
are copied depends on the section to which the layout is being copied:
l
All models and surfaces that can be displayed on the section will be copied.
The drillholes copied to the layout will depend on whether or not a filter is set for the layout:
o
If no distance filter was set for the original layout, all drillholes selected for the original layout will be
copied.
If a distance filter was applied to the original section, the filter will be applied and drillholes selected
that are within that distance of the section to which the layout is being copied.
To copy a layout, right-click on the section you wish to copy the layout to and select Copy Section Layout. In
the window that appears, select from the section layouts available in the project. A summary of the information
that will be copied is displayed to help you choose which layout to copy. Click OK to copy the layout, which will
appear in the project tree under the selected cross section. you can edit it by double-clicking on it.
Exporting a Cross Section

There are two options available for exporting cross sections:
l
The first option is to export the cross section as a DXF file (*.dxf). This option exports a series of DXF
lines created from the intersection of the evaluation volumes and the section plane. The lines generated
from each volume are saved as separate layers in the file. Right-click on the cross section in the project
tree and select Export. You will be prompted to select an evaluation to export with the cross section.
Enter a filename and location, then click Save.
The second option for exporting a cross section is to create a section layout and then export it as a PDF
file (*.pdf), Scalable Vector Graphics file (*.svg) or PNG image (*.png). This option is more flexible than
exporting the cross section as a DXF file as you have more control over the layout of the cross section.
See Creating Section Layouts for more information.
A serial section cannot be used to create a section layout. When exported as a DXF file, the serial section will
be exported in a single file with a collection of DXF lines based on intersections between the selected
evaluation and the section planes. The offset sections that make up a serial section can be exported in both
ways.
Rendering Images
Leapfrog Geo can render high-quality images that you can save on your computer in a format that can be used
in presentations and documents.
To save a rendered image, click on the Leapfrog Geo menu and select Render Image. Leapfrog Geo renders
an image from the current scene window, then displays it in the Render Image window:
Use the zoom tools at the bottom of the window to view the rendered image. You can change the image
settings by:
l
Selecting a new image size. To constrain the images proportions when changing size, tick the Keep
aspect box.
Changing Supersampling options to smooth jagged edges. The highest sampling option (4x4) will take
longer to process than the lowest sampling option or turning Supersampling off.
Viewing the image with or without overlays. See Changing Overlay Preferences for more information
about further customising the overlays displayed in the scene.
Click Render to render a new image with the updated settings. Once you are satisfied with the rendered
image, click Save. You will be prompted to enter a filename and location.
Saving and Editing Scenes | 369
Saving and Editing Scenes

A saved scene is a way of storing the shape list and settings so that the scene can be retrieved later. Saved
scenes are the basis of scene files exported to Leapfrog Viewer and are also used in creating movies. See:
l
A saved scene is, in effect, a bookmark of a specific view of the project data. When a scene is saved,
comments can be entered documenting what is in the scene.
A saved scene does not maintain an independent copy of the data in the project. If the data changes, then
the appearance of the scene will also change.
Saved scenes provide a stable point of reference in a project and can explain important aspects of the project,
which is especially useful for explaining aspects of a model to others using the project or viewing scene files.
To save the current scene, right-click on the Saved Scenes and Movies folder and select Save Current
Scene. The Save Scene window will be displayed:
Enter a name and description for the scene and click OK. The scene will be saved and added to the Saved
Scenes and Movies folder.
When you save a scene, the properties settings in the shape list are saved for the objects displayed in the
scene. For example, if a lithology table is displayed with the legend in the scene, the legend will be
displayed when the scene is restored. However, saved scenes do not store copies of the objects in the
project tree, and objects deleted from the project tree are no longer available in saved scenes.
To edit a scene, double-click on it. The Edit Saved Scene window will be displayed and you can update the
information.
To display a scene, drag it into the scene.

Once you have a series of saved scenes (see Saving and Editing Scenes), you can use them to create a
storyboard and export a movie.
To create a new movie, right-click on the Saved Scenes and Movies folder and select New Movie. A tab will
open in which you can create a storyboard and edit how each scene and transition is displayed. You can detach
the tab from the main window and work on scenes and create new scenes. Click the Refresh Scenes button
to refresh the scenes in the movie tab when you have made changes.
Select the saved scenes you wish to add to the movie by clicking on them in the list, then click the Add To
Storyboard button ( ). When subsequent scenes are added, transitions will be added to separate the scenes:
Change properties for the selected scene or transition, then click the play button ( ) to preview the settings.
To preview the whole movie, click the Select Whole Movie button ( ), then click play.
Enter a name and description for the movie and click the Save button ( ). The movie will be saved in the
Saved Scenes and Movies folder.
To export the movie, click the Save and Export button ( ). The Export Movie window will appear:
Exporting Scenes to Leapfrog Viewer | 371
If you tick Export frame images, individual frames will be saved as images, together with the movie file. Click
Export. You will be prompted to select a filename and location. Click Save to export the movie. Leapfrog Geo
will then save the movie in the specified location, which may take some time.

Once you have a series of saved scenes (see Saving and Editing Scenes), you can use them to create a scene
file that can be opened in Leapfrog Viewer.
To export a scene, right-click on the Saved Scenes and Movies folder and select Export Scenes. The
Export Scenes window will be displayed, together with the Select Scenes To Export window:
Select the scenes you wish to export by ticking the box for each scene. Once you have selected all the scenes
you want, click OK. The Export Scenes window will be displayed with the selected scenes listed:
If you tick the Export hidden shapes box, objects in the shape list that are not visible in the scene window will
be included in the exported scene.
You can also export the data associated with the objects in the scene window, if required. To do so, select the
Export all data that appears when I click option. If viewing the data is not required, or if you wish to keep
sensitive data secure, select the Export shapes only option.
When the Export all data that appears when I click option is selected, all data represented by shapes in
the exported scene will be accessible when the scene is opened in Leapfrog Viewer.
You can add more scenes to the list, if you wish, and change the order in which scenes will appear in the
exported file. When you have the scenes arranged, click Export. You will be prompted for a filename and
location.
Exported scenes cannot be reimported to the project.
Links to scene files can be included in HTML files using the following format:
<a href="LeapfrogViewer:[path or URL]">link text</a>
Linked scene files will be opened directly in Leapfrog Viewer only from browsers that support custom URI
schemes.
Creating Contour Lines from a Surface

To create contour lines from a surface, right-click on the Cross Sections and Contours folder and select New
Contour Lines From Surface.
The Surface to contour dropdown list contains all suitable surfaces in the project. Select the surface to use
for the new contour and adjust the Contour Spacing, if required.
If you want to offset the contours by a vector, enter a Contour offset value.
Click OK to generate the surface.
You can edit the contours by double-clicking on them.
The new contours will appear in the project tree under the Cross Sections and Contours folder and can be
exported to GIS packages.
Exporting GIS Contours

To export a contour lines object, right-click on the contour lines object in the Cross Sections and Contours
folder and select Export. The Export GIS contours window will be displayed:
Exporting GIS Contours | 373
Click Export. You will be prompted for a filename and location.

Leapfrog Geo User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Leapfrog Geo User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Leapfrog Geo User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

for Leapfrog Geo version 2.1

Copyright 2014 ARANZ Geo Limited

Getting Started with Leapfrog Geo

Leapfrog Geo Tutorials

Activating the Licence

Activating a Trial Licence

Activating a Dongle-Based Licence

Checking Out an OnDemand Licence

Activating Module Licences

Launching Leapfrog Geo

Converting Leapfrog Hydro Projects

Managing Project Files

Saving Zipped Copies

Saving a Backup Copy of a Project

Running the Graphics Test

Troubleshooting Video Card Issues

Updating Your Video Card Driver

Checking Your 3D/OpenGL Settings

The Leapfrog Geo Main Window

Working with the Project Tree

Naming and Renaming Objects in the Project Tree

Commenting on Objects in the Project Tree

Viewing Object Properties

The Histogram Tab

The Statistics Tab

Finding Objects in the Project Tree

Interacting with the Scene

2014 ARANZ Geo Limited

ii | Leapfrog Geo User Manual

Locating an Object From the Scene

Clicking in the Scene

Clicking in the Scene List

Using the Moving Plane

Slicing Through the Data

Measuring in the Scene

Determining an Objects Size

Using the Ruler to Measure Distances

Drawing With the Curved Line Tool

Adjusting the Polyline

Adding Surface Tangents

Using the Surface Ribbon and Inside/Outside Labels

Flipping the Polyline

Drawing With the Straight Line Tool

Flipping the Line

Using the Surface and Normal Ribbons

Changing Display and Navigation Settings

Changing Overlay Preferences

Screen Grid Settings

Axis Lines Settings

Changing the Colour Scheme

Changing Lighting Preferences

Changing Processing Preferences

Changing Help Preferences

Changing the 3D Acceleration Mode

Scaling the Z Axis

Using the Shape List and Shape Properties Panel

Changing an Objects Display Colour

Editing a Continuous Colourmap

Creating a Discrete Colourmap